Home

VPOP3 User Guide - Paul Smith Computer Services

1. Unfortunately the act of forwarding can add another line to the message headers so VPOP3 will receive a message header looking something like this Received from smtpmail megaisp net by mail megaisp net with SMTP id GTP39231 for lt bibble megaisp net gt Tue 13 Jan 1998 09 20 03 0000 Received from sender isp com by smtpmail megaisp net with SMTP id LPS23652 for lt Sarah bibble gadgets com gt Tue 13 Jan 1998 09 15 44 0000 Date Tue 13 Jan 1998 08 30 44 0000 To Sarah bibble gadgets com When VPOP3 sees this header it looks at the Received lines and tries to find a recognisable address In this case it may find bibble megaisp net if you ve set that as an Accepted Domain which is generally a good idea Next VPOP3 looks for recipients in the To lines in this case it finds sarah bibble gadgets com So VPOP3 will send a copy of this message to sarah and also the user who receives messages to bibble probably the Main Administrator or the recipient of messages to unknown users To get around this problem if your ISP or web hosting company is providing email forwarding go to the In Mail Property Page press the Routing button and choose Read Received Fields In Reverse This tells VPOP3 to search the Received lines from the bottom up so in the above example it would find sarah bibble gadgets com again and just send a single copy of the message to sarah If that doesn t work then you can te
2. Display Name If you edit this file using a text editor like Notepad or the DOS Edit program the next time you do an LDAP search or use the Edit LDAP Data button the new attributes will be active v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 187 VPOP3 Your email post office External LDAP Address Book If you go to the Users page press Advanced and press the Edit External Address Book button you will be able to edit your global address book which is accessible to any LAN computer which has LDAP compatible software running External Address Book Entries Ei EI FredBloggs frediaol com Hew Edit Hemose Import Bi j Export Help i The main list shows all the entries in your address book with their Display Name and their email address shown You can create new entries by pressing the New button edit existing entries by pressing the Edit button or remove entries by pressing the Remove button You can also import export the external address book into a CSV file which can be edited using many spreadsheet or database programs External LDAP Address Book CSV File Format Page 188 CSV Comma Separated Variable files can be created by many programs such as spreadsheet and database programs The general format of a CSV file is that each record is on a new line and each field is separated from the next by a comma Text fields are surrounded by quotes T
3. Now a configuration dialog should appear looking like lt WPOPS Settings EE Admin Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Out Mail Schedule Local Mail l Misc Local Servers Users Mappings Lists In Mail Connection Out ueue Cer Postmaster 0 Help Add Edit Queue Remove advanced The little symbol next to Postmaster indicates that this user is an administrator There are several other symbols which can be shown as well as combinations User is an Administrator User has an AutoResponder User has an Assistant A User has Forwarding User has both an Assistant and Forwarding v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 49 VPOP3 Your email post office You will also see a user called Outqueue This is a pseudo user which you can use to view the outgoing mail queue The only command available with this user is Queue The Group column in the list is purely informational You can enter a Group for each user This can be used for sorting this list so VPOP3 can display users in the same group next to each other You might find it useful to use this item for things like users departments or pupil classes The Pending Msgs column shows how many messages are waiting in that user s local mailbox Adding a New User To add a new user you press the Add button Editing an Existing User If you want to edit a user pressing the Edit
4. Tour e mail address i the address other people use to send e maill messages to you This address has been assigned to you by your Internet service provider E mail address aL fo SI co uk For example johnsrnthrnicrozoth com lt Back Cancel Help In E mail address enter your email address Press Next to define the email servers internet Connection Wizard E mail Server Names Mi incoming mail server is 4 POPS server Type the name of your incoming mail server Incoming mall POPS or IMAP server jig2 1 boo An SMTP server is the server that is used for your outgoing e mail Type the name of pour SMTP server Outgoing mail SMTP server 192 168 57 1 Back Cancel Help Select My incoming mail server is a POP3 server In Incoming mail server enter the IP address of the VPOP3 server or 127 0 0 1 if you are not on a LAN In Outgoing mail server enter the same IP address as the Incoming mail server v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 141 VPOP3 Your email post office Press Next to tell Outlook Express how to log on to VPOP3 Internet Connection Wizard Internet Mail Logon IF pour Internet service provider requires You to use Secure Password Authentication SFA to access your e mail account select the Log Un Using Secure Password Authentication option Otherwise select the Log Un Using option and type the e mail account name and password your Internet s
5. lt widgets superisp com gt mike lt widgets superisp com gt However to allow the sending of local email you must specify a Local Email Domain let s say that is localmail All the users email client software must be set up so that the users email addresses are lt name gt localmail e g jim localmail Local Email This means that local mail will work fine For instance if jim wants to send a message to mike he will send it to mike localmail When mike receives the message it will have come From jim localmail so any replies will correctly go back to the jim The Problem with Internet Mail The problem arrises with Internet email clare sends a message to bill microsoft com When bill receives the message it will have come From clare localmail so any replies will not reach clare they will probably bounce The Solution To fix this problem you would go to the Edit User window for the local users and enter Internet Reply Addresses as appropriate So you would set the Internet Reply Address for clare to be clare lt widgets superisp com gt Now when clare sends her message to bill microsoft com VPOP3 will change the From address of her message so that it will read From clare lt widgets superisp com gt and replies to her will go to the correct address v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 67 VPOP3 Your email post office Messages to Multiple Recipients VPOP3 will correctl
6. POP3 Setup Helper EES Connection Method Raia ISP POPS Server mail compulink co uk User Hame J Password faa ISP SMTP Server rail compulink co uk Main Usage Pattern Small Business Message Routing anvone ivourdomain bi Email Domain cix co uk compulink co uk OF Cancel Help v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 21 VPOP3 Your email post office VPOP3 with NT3 51 The VPOP3 installer has a beta test NT3 51 installer Windows NT 3 51 does not have a taskbar so the VPOP3 icon cannot be used for controlling VPOP3 Instead you can use the command line parameters or web browser interface to control various aspects of VPOP3 such as showing the configuration page or viewing the status window The beta test installer should add icons for these common operations to the VPOP3 program manager group Note that the use of VPOP3 under Windows NT 3 51 is not fully supported but several people are using it without problems User Logon Enter the user Id and password of a VPOP3 user who is defined as an administrator If this is the first time you have used VPOP3 the initial administrator is defined as User Id postmaster Password admin Make sure that you type the password in using the correct letter case Registration Information Click the Register button of the Info tab YPOP3 Settings Ei ES Connection l Iri Pl ail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Users Mappings Li
7. VPOP3 Your email post office Global Signature amp Header Modifiers The Global Signature is a short piece of text which will be appended to all outgoing Internet messages This should ideally only be 2 or 3 lines long to avoid annoying the people who receive email from your site You should also remember that users may have set up their own signatures in their email software packages A good use for the Global Signature is to act as a disclaimer for all messages indicating that any views expressed in the messages are views of the individual not of your company You can define edit the Global Signature by going to the Users Property Page pressing Advanced and then pressing Edit Global Sign Headers Global Signature Z Header Modifiers Ei Ei Standard Signature oil Global Header Modifiers opecity any header fields you want modified for outgoing messages Specify them as Field Data LF pou Use Field then the field will be removed Organization Paul Smith Comp The following special values can be used as well fea Z0 riginator ore character Cancel Help VPOP3 will add the global signature to text and HTML messages other format messages eg Microsoft s rich text format may not have the signature added Global Header Modifiers are header fields which VPOP3 adds or removes to all outgoing email messages This can be useful for adding X Organisation header fields for instance Ch
8. paua 32 165 571 Real name Paul Smith Connection Method Winsock Network PPP SLIP Shell account access F Offline ro connections Checking Malil oi T3 Sending Mail Cancel POP Account This should be lt mailbox gt lt server address gt where lt mailbox gt is the User ID of the person who will be using this copy of Eudora and lt server address gt is the IP address of your VPOP3 server If you have set it up on a LAN you should have made a note of the IP address If you are running it on a standalone PC enter 127 0 0 1 e g fred 127 0 0 1 Real Name Enter the user s real name Connection Method Choose Winsock and clear the Offline box v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 127 VPOP3 Your email post office Personal Information Page Options ki x bit Getting Started Paul Smith paulpscs co Uk es Sending Mail paui pscscouk CheckingMal TOO O Se eu POP Account This should already have been entered as above Real Name This should already have been entered as above Return Address Enter the user s email address here Dialup username Leave this blank Hosts Options Ei EI paulo 92 168 57 Getting Stared sega 192 168 57 1 Personal Info Checking Mall oi T3 Sending Mail nm POP Account This should already have been entered as above Page 128 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your
9. If you want all messages to the list to be approved by the moderator before being sent to the list then enable Moderated Message Posts This works after the above restrictions on who can send messages to the list So you can choose Allow Members to post messages as well as Moderated Message Posts In that case Messages sent by moderators will get sent to the list immediately Messages sent by list members will get sent to the moderator for approval Messages sent by anyone else will be rejected automatically If you enable the Ignore Bad Posts option any message posts to the list which aren t allowed just disappear rather than being sent to the list moderator as error messages Moderating Mailing Lists A Mailing list requires control to some degree The person who controls or moderates the mailing list is called the Moderator VPOP3 Mailing lists can be set up so that certain tasks require intervention by the list s moderator At one level the moderator has very little work to do and the list can effectively run without any intervention at all In this case the moderator will simply receive any error messages which occur due to the mailing list operation This will normally be message post failures because people have registered with the mailing list with their email address and then their address has changed If the moderator requires more control he she can decide that all messages posted to the mailing list
10. Inline Expansion Tags You can specify certain control sequences in Simple AutoResponders which are converted to text at the time of the response These are text items which will probably vary from response to response These control sequences are known as Inline Expansion Tags Inline Expansion Tags have the format tag and can be included anywhere in the message text If you want to have a real symbol in your message prefix it with a V symbol Available Inline Expansion Tags Date Expands to the current date in the format defined for your Locale LongDate Expands to the current date in the long format defined for your Locale ShortDate Expands to the current date in the short format defined for your Locale Date lt format string gt Expands to the current date in the format defined by the format string Time Expands to the current time in the format defined for your Locale TimeNoSecs Expands to the current time without any seconds in the format defined for your Locale Time lt format string gt Expands to the current time in the format defined by the format string Page 80 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Originator Expands to the email address of the person who sent the original message OrigSubject Expands to the subject line of the original message Subject Expands to the subject of the response message Section Expands to the current
11. Leave messages on server after retrieval This is your choice but normally you will leave this turned off v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 155 VPOP3 Your email post office Press the More Options button Hore Mail Server Preferences Local mail directory E Program Files MetecapesUsersdefaultymail Choose IMAP server directory M Check for mail every li 0 minutes M Remember my mail password Cancel IMAP server directory Leave this empty Check for mail every x minutes Set this as you require this option tells Netscape to periodically check VPOPS3 for new mail Remember my mail password Normally you will want to enable this option Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI based applications If you enable this option then you can send mail through Netscape from programs like Microsoft Word which have a Send To menu option This option will use slightly more memory but will let you use email directly from more applications Press OK That completes the Netscape Messenger configuration The Groups Server settings are for UseNet which VPOP3 doesn t support The Directory settings allow Netscape Messenger to access LDAP Page 156 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office LDAP with Netscape Messenger 4 Setting up the LDAP service in Netscape Messenger 4 To set up Netscape Messenger 4 to use VPOP3 as an LDAP server go to the Edit menu in Messenger and choose Preferences
12. Set Order Press the Add button and choose Directory Service internet Connection Wizard Internet Directory Server Name Type the name of the Internet directory LDAP server your Internet service provider or system administrator has given WOU Internet directory LDAF server li 92 166 57 1 IF pour Internet service provider or system administrator has Informed you that they require you to log on to your LDAP server and has provided you with an LOAP account name and password select the check box below T My LOAP server requires me to log on 4 Back Cancel Help 1 In Internet Directory LDAP server type the IP address of the VPOP3 server 2 VPOP3 does not require you to log on v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 149 VPOP3 Your email post office 3 Press Next gt 4 Do Not check addresses using this directory service 5 Press Next gt Internet Connection Wizard In Internet directory service name type the name which you want to this service to be called Press Next gt Press Finish Page 150 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Using the LDAP service in Outlook 98 Once you have set up the VPOP3 LDAP service in Outlook 98 you use it by going to the Tools menu in Outlook and choosing the Address Book option Press the Find button From the Look in list choose the name you called the VPOP3 LDAP service when telling Outlook 98 about it E
13. This tells ListServer to respond with a list of all non confidential mailing lists To customise the message create a text file called Is_lists txt in the VPOP3 directory Subscribe can be shortened to Sub This tells ListServer to attempt to join you to a mailing list ListServer will only join the sender of the message Some other mailing list automatons can join arbitrary people to mailing lists This has the problem that people can maliciously join other people to mailing lists so VPOP3 won t support that function unless we get lots of requests for it You can specify a custom welcome message for each mailing list if you desire see Mailing List Properties Unsubscribe this can be shortened to Uns This tells ListServerto remove you from a mailing list Specifying as the mailing list will remove you from all mailing lists You can specify a custom message to be added to the response if you desire see Mailing List Properties Users If enabled this tells VPOP3 to return the member list of a mailing list v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 101 VPOP3 Your email post office Which This gives you a list of which mailing lists you are currently a member of When ListServer has finished processing all its commands it will respond to the originator with the results If the commands included a Subscribe command ListServer will tell the person how to unsubscribe from the list this is in case someone faked
14. From this page you can configure Automatic Login This makes it easier to get to the VPOP3 property page since you don t need to enter an administrator username amp password However it obviously reduces security since anyone with access to the VPOP3 server PC can access the configuration pages Generate Connection Error Messages This option is for advanced users Normally this should be left turned on However if you are expecting to receive lots of connection error messages for instance if your LAN or RAS connection is temporary you may wish to turn it off If you turn off this option it disables error messages generated during initial connection to the ISP s email servers It will not disable any error messages generated during the connection eg dropped connections protocol errors or server failures All error messages go to the Main Administrator RAS Error Messages If you enable this option VPOP3 will send the Main Administrator an error message after four consecutive failed attempts to connect to the Internet this doesn t count Retries specified on the Connection page so if you have told VPOPS3 to retry 3 times an error will be generated after 12 dial attempts 4 times 3 retries each time VPOP3 won t send any further error messages until it has either managed to connect successfully or until the next day Require APOP Authentication Page 210 The normal method of POP3 user authentication is by
15. Server Time out 1 minute v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 123 VPOP3 Your email post office Connection Tab Options OEE Thre mianra WAS AU Gr Tenn Geittat ete Gta E Disconnect when finshed FET Ohi ama eet ita LOK cancel Aon On the Connection tab of the Mail Options property sheet choose I Use a LAN Connection Page 124 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Send Tab E E Sege Check the Send Messages Immediately box this will tell Internet Mail to send outgoing mail directly to the VPOP3 server rather than storing it in the Internet Mail Outbox v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 125 VPOP3 Your email post office Read Tab lt i You will probably want to check the Check for new messages every box and enter a number in the entry field This is how often Internet Mail will ask VPOP3 if there are any new messages for you If you don t do this you will need to ask Microsoft Internet Mail to check for mail periodically Page 126 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Eudora This description is for 32 bit Eudora Light 3 0 1 available from http www eudora com Other Eudora 3 x software will be very similar All options not mentioned below can be set as you desire Choose Tools Options from the menu Getting Started Page ki Options Category POP account
16. Servers Connection Advanced Mail account Enter the friendly name vou would like to refer to these servers by For example work or Microsoft Mail User information Name Paul Smith Organization E mail address paul pscs co uk Reply address W Include this account when doing a full Send and Receive cancel Ao _ The Mail account Friendly Name is just the name you wish to use to refer to this mail account This can be anything you want In User Information Name This is your name Organization This is your optional organization name eg your company or school name E mail address This is your email address that the message will come From Reply address This is the address that replies will be sent to if it is different from the above E mail address Select Include this account when doing a full Send and Receive if you want Outlook Express to normally send amp receive using this account Page 144 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Security Tab paul Properties Bijer Ee GTN TG Leave Use a digital ID blank v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 145 VPOP3 Your email post office Servers Tab f paul Properties 192 168 57 1 POPS Seting In Outgoing mail and Incoming mail enter the IP address of the PC which VPOP3 is running on or 127 0 0 1 if you are not using a LAN Select My incoming mail server is a POP3 server
17. VPOP3 will send any locally sent mail for an unrecognised use to the ISP This is slightly different from the Treat as REMOTE option on the Admin page because that option will ignore incoming messages for unrecognised users whereas this option won t LAN Forwarding The bottom section of the page shows you how many users have had email forwarded using LAN Forwarding and also lets you edit the SMTPFWD DAT file NOTE if you use this button to edit the SMTPFWD DAT file VPOP3 will re read the file when you have finished v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 43 VPOP3 Your email post office Local Servers Local Servers Property Page VPOP3 contains several different server components The Local Servers property page lets you specify which of these server components you wish to run and some configuration details about these servers POP3 Settings Ei ES Misc Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists Local Mail Admin Connection l In Mail Out Mail Schedule sa Local Servers i Enable Fort Allow Connections On PUPS Server M 110 LAN 4 SMTP Server Passwd Server Lo ERERE Finger Server Admin Server M HTTP Admin Svr i LOAP Server Mail HTTP Swr Reset Defaults M Use Same low Connections Addresses cm l mm j Jw 255 v i l oo VPOP3 can run up to 8 different TCP IP servers POP3 server This is a key component of VPOP
18. d Add count of suspended members to List Advanced window Allow informing the moderator of a mailing list of unsubscriptions only instead of subscriptions amp unsubscriptions Allow moderator to turn on off the use of the USERS command for each mailing list Add tooltips to some controls amp more context sensitive help Allow setting of VPOP3 Extensions on the Misc page Extensions are external programs which VPOP3 runs on certain events Add Anti relay settings to the Tuning page Allow setting of autoresponders finger LDAP information during Add User as well as Edit user Add MaxHops setting to reduce occurrences of infinite loops eg in LAN forwarding Add Show Detail to the control menu of the status window as well as being able to double click the caption Improve operation of remote moderators of mailing lists Make wait cursor disappear if VPOP3 is run with command line options when it s already running Improve reliability of task tray icon appearing when logging on in NT If a CONNECT NOW file is put in VPOP3 directory it will connect immediately Add basic HTTP administration server port 5107 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office What s new in VPOP3 V1 2 5 Make LDAP server support more attributes than the basic Common Name and mail attributes Allow In Mail configurations to be simply enabled di
19. domain names the bit after the sign are intended for you so you could put yourcompany co uk here If there are many mail domains that you can accept due to email aliasing or forwarding then separate the names with semicolons or commas Also if you want to accept mail for a single user at a domain you can put the username followed by followed by the domain name e g fred myisp co uk See Common ISPs for common settings for some ISPs The section Accepted Domains discusses this important field in more depth Note if you leave this field empty VPOP3 will not know which email recipients it should be handling so the default user will get an error message saying There was incoming mail with no recipients SMTP Incoming Mail VPOP3 can receive email from your Internet provider using the SMTP protocol as well as or instead of the POP3 protocol SMTP has certain advantages the greatest of which is that email addressing is explicit rather than implicit as with the POP3 protocol therefore there should be fewer message routing problems Different Internet Providers offer SMTP delivery to your server VPOP3 in different ways e The simplest is that your ISP automatically detects VPOP3 connecting and then starts sending the email within a few seconds without VPOP3 having to do anything special first e Other ISPs require you to connect to their server first and issue a command to tell them to start se
20. otherwise it would try and send this message to both simon and philip at your site instead of only to simon e By looking at the ACCEPTED DOMAINS setting VPOP3 knows which email domains is should be processing for the particular IN MAIL configuration In the above example this setting would contain at least yourcompany co uk v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 105 VPOP3 Your email post office Routing Downloaded Messages VPOP3 has several ways that it can route messages it downloads using the POP3 protocol Each Incoming Mail configuration can have its own routing methods configured simply press the Routing button on the In Mail property page In Mail Name EIA ue retina Demon POPS Extensions Special Header Apparently To wy ae Fields iz M Use Received fields M Read Received fields in Reverse T Always send to pa o Yd Attempt to work with a single email address by detecting text name or comment if possible C Search Subject for lis C Forward to another LAN Mail Server RISE frede 92 168 571 M Attempt to remove duplicated messages ce ee ee The five main options you have are According to Recipient This option is the default and means that VPOP3 will search the message headers for fields which define the message recipient More Details about Routing According to Recipient Always send to This option tells VPOP3 to send all mail from this mail server to a
21. this list of servers until it find one which responds and then it will use that server to send all the valid outgoing mail If the list is empty or it cannot find a responding server VPOP3 will simply not try to send any outgoing mail If the SMTP server is not on TCP IP Port 25 enter the server name in a format similar to mail isp com 1025 In the Domain Filtering section you can enter simple rules which tell VPOP3 whether it can send queued outgoing mail using this Connection or not You enter a list of email domains one per line which VPOP3 can send to the email domain is the part of the email address after the If you want to tell VPOP3 NOT to send mail to a certain domain place a in front of the domain name For instance if you have a Domain Filtering list of bibble com bobble com VPOP3 will send mail to someone bibble com through this Connection but not mail to someone bobble com Mail to someone bobble com will be held in the outgoing queue until a suitable Connection is made The domain means that VPOP3 matches any email domain so the line tells VPOP3 that it can send mail to any domain Note that VPOP3 goes through the list until it finds one which matches and then it stops so in the above example mail to someone bobble com will not be sent even though the domain is specified as well If the Domain Filtering list is empty VPOP3 will send mail to any domain through that Connection howeve
22. you install TCP IP support by going to the Network applet in the control panel In the list of Network Components there should be an entry TCP IP or TCP IP via lt network adapter gt If this entry doesn t exist press the Add button followed by Protocol choose Microsoft from the list and choose TCP IP Assigning IP addresses Secondly each machine on the network needs to be given a unique IP address This is anumber made up of four parts e g 192 168 65 120 If two machines on a network have the same number they won t work correctly For these instructions we will assume that you have a network which is not directly connected to the Internet it could be connected via a firewall or some software like WinGate but that is an indirect connection so this still applies We will also assume that you have a relatively small network less than approx 250 PCs all on the same network segment In this case a set of IP numbers have been assigned which you are allowed to use with no risk of them conflicting with real Internet addresses These numbers start with 192 168 there are a couple of other sets you can use instead if you wish but we prefer the 192 168 set If you add another number between 0 and 255 to these numbers you have chosen your Network address For this example we will use 0 so our network address is 192 168 0 0 the trailing 0 means that this address refers to
23. 1999 User Manual Page 39 VPOP3 Your email post office This method of message routing is not recommended if there are other options available because it cannot be 100 reliable and it relies on the message sender using the correct format The sender should send a message to user1 lt user isp com gt or user isp com user1 VPOP3 can detect the useri in these entries and use that to route the message instead of the user isp com Incoming Mailing List Messages VPOP3 can have trouble correctly routing messages from external mailing lists or messages which use the BCC Blind Carbon Copy sending method The reason for this is that on the Internet until it reaches your ISP all mail is sent using the SMTP protocol SMTP sends messages in two parts first of all the Envelope which contains addressing information just like a paper envelope followed by the Message Data This means that the message itself doesn t need to contain any addressing information at all When the message reaches your ISP it is placed into a POP3 mailbox unless you receive mail using SMTP At this point the SMTP Envelope is lost so the only addressing information available to VPOP3 is that contained in the email messageitself Normally this is OK because normal email messages contain the recipients in the To or Ce field of the header however Mailing lists don t usually list their recipients in the message header a because it would be too long
24. 1999 User Manual Page 77 VPOP3 Your email post office The diagram below shows how this works aj Meo o Head Office goen User j Bi p Office 2 Office 3 e In this setting Office 2 and Office 3 are configured to dial into the Head Office as if that is the Internet Service Provider Mobile users can dial into the head office in the same way Lets say that the company has a registered domain of company com and the users at each office are listed below We will only describe the Head Office and Office 2 Office 3 will be similar to Office 2 Head Office e Sarah e John e Philip Office 2 e Martin e Karen At Head Office 1 Create users called Sarah John Philip Office2 Office3 2 Create mappings from Martin and Karen to Office2 At Office 2 1 Create users called Martin and Karen 2 What to do with Incoming mail for Unknown Recipients should be set to Treat as REMOTE 3 Create a Connection to dial into the Head Office RAS server 4 Set the In Mail to collect from the Office2 account at the Head Office VPOP3 server 5 Set the Out Mail to send to the Head Office VPOP3 server Page 178 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Distributed Sites Using REMOTE Mappings This method uses a single email account which is shared by each office This has various disadvantages 1 There is no technical reason why users at one office couldn t read mail for users at
25. 3 51 probably e It must have a bit of free disk space The VPOP3 software is quite compact 4 MB should be plenty for the software including any log files which it generates However you will need extra space for any mail messages which are sent or received You are the best person to guess how much space this will be it depends how heavily you will use email and whether you will be transferring large files around As a rough estimate we d say 1MB per user for light usage and 10 20MB per user for extremely heavy usage it s best to err on the side of caution v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 19 VPOP3 Your email post office The file storage does not need to be visible over the network for security reasons it is best if it isn t visible The file system used for storing files should support long filenames VPOP3 uses the user name as the name of the directory for storing a user s messages therefore if you are using a file system which only supports 8 3 filenames you can only have user mailbox names up to 8 characters VPOP3 doesn t have very high processing requirements a 66MHz 486 should be fine However you may have problems using a high speed modem on such a PC It needs to have some form of Internet connectivity This can either be a modem and a configured RAS or DUN connection NB You should test this thoroughly before installing VPOP3 otherwise you may blame VPOP3 for a badly configured RAS confi
26. 77 AutoResponders 185 External 185 186 Base Directory 206 BCC Messages 36 Binary Attachments 195 Bounce Message 213 Customising 213 Bouncing Messages 211 Browsing Queues 71 Built in Lists 85 Calypso 158 Centralised Address Book 189 190 CGI 80 Autoresponders 80 Change Internet Email Reply Address 62 Changing Password using a Web Browser 67 Changing Passwords 56 Choosing the VPOP3 Server 18 CIX Internet 110 111 ClaraNet 111 112 Closing VPOP3 170 211 Command Line Parameters 174 Common ISP Settings 110 Common Settings for multiple users 57 Complex Schedule 116 Configuration 172 Remote 172 Configure Inward SMTP Feed 31 Configure Multiple POP3 mailboxes 33 Configure Single POP3 mailbox with domain forwarding 29 Configure Single POP3 mailbox without forwarding 35 Configuring VPOP3 23 Connect Retry Count 216 Connect Retry Time 216 Connecting 120 via LAN 25 via Modem 25 Connecting Automatically 27 Connecting on each message send 225 Connecting to the ISP 120 Connection Parameters 216 Connection Property Page 25 Connections 24 use 29 User Manual Page 23 VPOP3 Your email post office Copying Messages between Mailboxes 72 Creating a VPOP3 Mailing List 88 Creating an External Router 175 CSV File Import Export 72 CSV Files 59 60 61 190 202 Exported User Database Format 60 Exporting 59 External Address Book Format 189 Full Format 61 Importing 202 Least Inform
27. Assistant Using Mailer ACI OM ct cerecscestedecccenceecenccececececececececacacacecseaecewesesddasessssussssssvdsucus sunusvevecnvecssbetts 212 set Finger Planiusing Mailer DAG nsssssscacacacscssssscssssasasensscexexoanesesesenenesesennsnanansnsncnnnacceccasasecececedtadeccracececeees 213 Set Forwarding Settings using Mailer Daemon esssssscscecececesecscesesssesessseesesescsesesssesesescsesessseseeseeeseees 213 Tuning Parameters 214 VPOPS File 1 ranster MCC OG erisso n ii nn nn e E 218 Servel COMMBUE ATION sanne Tenn N r a n a a e nn ei eini 218 Remote PC C OniguraC Osish l 219 Registry Tweaks 220 LAN Forwarding 222 SMTEPFYVO DAT File Forma Eekan AA GS 222 CBT gk AT a FEU RECIDIE ME earn AA 222 BIA St VL AdO CS 865s c sooo o cc cg cusses cacy cu cuss ca cucu ccc ee escucuccuceescsuucuccucessesczca neces st t as oe aieeye ray aessses cascades 222 ENS 7 CPE ceed eee eee cere cece cee eee Eo decrees 223 Troubleshooting 224 Connecting on Gach Message SON dissoren ne a er E Er EE EE E E O E R 224 VPOP Eror Message Sersrirn neni nee 224 VPOP POP 3 GClient COnnectHhon ROD CIM seccecesseentseconccerererorennsnscereroncanensnncereronveueneemerenenenneneeennerentverisieels 224 VPOR3 POPR3 Client Probleiiiscusism mans innn nn aan eds 224 VPOPR3 sSMTP Client Connection PrODICM yssscsessscssssssssospspocasssssoapsnscasssenesssncsseeateuisisioieaseuisiowmcunaeeeas 225 MFO PS SOCK CUED ONS ccc ces ess ces Rak seat ec ie fatale A o nat sacra 225 Socket Error 1
28. CMD EXE Windows NT with the parameters c followed by the batch file name e g c windows command com c c vpop3 myextension bat If the extension is a PERL script PL enter PERL EXE with the script name as the parameter e g c perl bin perl exe c program files myextension p Note if there are any spaces in the path to the program or script that path must be surrounded by double quotes as in the PERL example above The Timeout column tells VPOP3 how long each program should be allowed to run before being terminated by VPOP3 The values are in seconds Post Connect and Pre Disconnect Commands Page 186 These commands are run just after VPOP3 connects or just before it disconnects from the ISP The same program is run for each Connection but the environment variable CONNECTION is set to the appropriate connection number 1 10 depending on which connection has been made or is about to be closed User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office LDAP server VPOP3 supports the LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol protocol This is the equivalent of a searchable Internet telephone directory To make use of VPOP3 s LDAP server you need an email client which supports the LDAP protocol as well Some examples of this are Netscape Messenger Microsoft Outlook Express Calypso etc Support for LDAP is becoming more and more common in modern email clients The first thing you need to do to use L
29. COMmMandS seesessessesessesessesseseesessessesessessessesesseseesessesseseesessesseseseesess 186 LDAP server 187 EDAPRA TRPE oane EEEIEE E EASAN GOLE E 187 External LDAP Address BOOK cicis estes isindoveechesaietsi tts tee ieee E 188 External LDAP Address Book CSV File Format ccsssssssessessessssessessesssessesseseenes 188 External LDAP Address Book Entry esssssssssssececsssecesecessscesecesssceceeseescsceseesscecesenses 189 Personal DetailS nicnn a a E a aaeeea A AAAA a 189 PUSS S DEIS ienen a R 190 BUSNES Addres Se OOE cau eda aausnasedi gas 190 VOR a SUDON Carike a a rege nes merser tenes errr enr rr rentrrs 190 External Routing 191 Uses Tor External ROUTES cxccisccs icc c ceacsiestac A NA 19 Telling VPOP3 about the External Router ccssssscssscescsssssesesssessscescsssssesecsseeseeeesees 19 Creating an External ROuter cccscsssccssscscscssssscssscsscsscsscssssessscesesssesssecssesssessesceesseaseees 192 External Router Example S ieiccts acess iens ET E een 192 How to Virus Gheek Incoming Attachments sccceseswsncncususesedolescococeiorerelerererecececenertaneretsensesodnneece eas 192 File Attachments 194 Files VPOP3 Uses 195 PEIN SST VOU oo ea ascents E AA E E stan ceca cpus oe nz A E E E teaches 198 Emabling Finger Server ACCESS gcse sireccceses sss essaccscee EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE CEECEE EEEE E E AE 198 Headers Property Page 199 Fome ser yer TO aaan A ETA tese mI 200 Can t Remove L
30. ESMTP for lt mylist pscs co uk gt Thu 4 Jun 1998 00 23 32 0100 Message ID lt 3575DAF3 2 DD3458 pscs co uk gt Date Thu 04 Jun 1998 00 23 32 0100 From Fred Bloggs lt fred pscs co uk gt X Mailer Mozilla 4 03 en Win95 I MIME Version 1 0 To myList pscs co uk Subject My Message X Server VPOP3 V1 2 8 Registered to PSCS Sender mylist_owner pscs co uk Reply To mylist pscs co uk This is a sample moderated message As a moderator you should simply reply to this message using your email client including the incoming message text You can modify the message text if you wish in the reply and add remove anything you wish v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 99 VPOP3 Your email post office When VPOP3 receives the message from a moderator with the text Mod xxxxx in the subject line it will scan the message text and strip out the text before the women nn nn nnn mann mann line and also automatically remove any line prefixes eg gt that your email client added to your reply This facility has been tested with several email clients but you should check that you know how it works before using it for real Advanced List Features This window is accessed by choosing Add Edit List from the Lists page and pressing the Advanced button Advanced List Functions kd Ea List has 237 members 10 suspended banned Export Members to File Close Help The Import and Export options save
31. Header Processing shutdown VPOPS Note that because of the limitations of using HIML the web based administration server is not as fully functional as the standard property pages Administration by Telnet VPOP3 contains a basic text interface remote configuration protocol Page 212 To access the administration server at a command line type Telnet lt address gt 5106 where lt address gt is the IP address of the VPOP3 server or 127 0 0 1 if you re not on a network You need to be an administrator to have access to this service User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office The protocol specification is too complex to be fully described here However basic help is available by typing HELP once you are logged onto this server Administration by email By sending messages to Mailer_Daemon you can change user settings Set Assistant using Mailer Daemon To set your assistant by email send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Set Assistant The message text should contain the lines USERNAME lt username gt PASSWORD lt password gt ASSISTANT ONLY lt assistant name gt Use ONLY if you only want the assistant to receive your messages Don t use it if you want to receive the messages in your mailbox as well For instance USERNAME paul PASSWORD semolina ASSISTANT fiona Note If the USERNAME entry does not match the sender of the message the user
32. In Mail configuration which you can set up for user2 Follow steps 1 7 above for user2 instead of user1 Repeat 7 For each ISP mail server 4 Go to the Out Mail Page 1 In Domain to Add to Unqualified Addresses enter your email domain e g mycompany com Enable Route Local Mail Locally In Local Mail Domains enter your email domain e g mycompany com 5 Go to the Local Mail Page 4 In Domain to Add to Unqualified Addresses enter your email domain e g mycompany com Enable Route Local Mail Locally In Local Mail Domains enter your email domain e g mycompany com 6 Go to the Misc Page If you have a proxy connection turn off If Outgoing Mail arrives whilst online Send Immediately If you have a permanent connection you can leave this option on or off as you prefer If you are connecting through a SOCKS Proxy enter the SOCKS proxy details at the bottom of this window 7 Go to the Schedule Page and define your connection schedule Configure a single POP3 mailbox without forwarding This topic gives step by step instructions for configuring VPOP3 to work with a single POP3 email account which accepts mail for a single address For the sake of this example we will assume that e Your email address is user isp com but that you have two users userl and user2 who you wish to share the account e The ISP s POP3 mail server is pop3 isp com and the SMTP mail server is smtp isp com v 1 3 0 May
33. Mail Pegasus mail is a very flexible program hence this description will only handle a certain common case This assumes that you are using the 32 bit Pegasus software which has been installed on a TCP IP network and you are using the WinSock built into Pegasus rather than going through a User Defined Gateway UDG From the menu choose File Network Configuration Categories Properties Advanced settings Attachment viewers Button panel settings POPS host 192 168 57 1 Help Clickable links g General settings User name Tutorial Home mailbox location Baseman a_i Message editor settings Message reader settings For recenving mal Network configuration For sending mail SMTP host 152 166 57 1 Signatures Advanced options The assistance of an expenenced user is recommended when accessing Pegasus Mail s advanced conliguration options Advanced configuration options The information necessary to complete this screen is Cancel usually supplied o you by your Internet Service Provider or by your system administrator For Receiving Mail POP3 host Enter the IP address of the VPOP3 server or 127 0 0 1 if you are not ona LAN User name Enter the Username defined in VPOP3 for the mailbox you want to access Password Enter the Password defined in VPOP3 for the mailbox you want to access For Sending Mail SMTP host Type the IP address of the VPOP3 server the same as the POP3 host
34. Mail configurations for each VPOP3 server regardless of the size of licence you own e To select the configuration you are configuring open up the drop down list called Svr e To add anew configuration open the Svr drop down list and choose the lt New gt option e To remove a configuration select the configuration to delete and press the Remove button By default each Incoming Mail configuration is given a name such as Svr 17 This name will be used if VPOP3 reports any errors when using the configuration To make it easier to keep track of which configuration is which you can define your own name to each configuration You do this by entering the name you want to call it in the box next to the Svr list v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 29 VPOP3 Your email post office Next you choose which method you want VPOP3 to use for getting mail either POP3 SMTP or VPOP3 File XFer e POP3 Incoming Mail e SMIP Incoming e VPOP3 File XFer Incoming Mail Use Connections The Use Connections section allows you to tell VPOP3 which Connections VPOP3 can use to connect to this mail server If any of the selected Connections are started by VPOP3 this Incoming Mail configuration will be used If a Connection which is not selected is started by VPOP3 this Incoming Mail configuration will NOT be used Enable The Enable button lets you disable or enable this Incoming Mail Configuration simply In Mail Settings in Detail T
35. Messages These settings can be On Off or neither On All group members always have the setting enabled Off All group members always have the setting disabled Neither grey All group members have the setting set individually If Force User Configuration to Match these Settings is enabled these user settings cannot be changed If it is disabled the group settings are just the initial user settings and each user s settings can be changed individually if desired Enabled If this is turned On the user acts as normal If it is turned Off the user will not be able to access their mailbox Change Internet Mail Reply Address To If there is a user setting that will take precedence If there is no user setting the group setting takes precedence as below If you put a normal email address as the group setting that is the Internet Reply Address If you specify an address like domain VPOP3 will substitute the username in the place of the For example if the group setting is louise acme com the Internet Reply Address for all users in this group will be louise acme com If the group setting is lt ouise acme com gt the Internet Reply Address will be different for each user User helen will have a reply address of helen lt louise acme com gt v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 6l VPOP3 Your email post office This facility can be very useful when using the Single Email Address routing method Ma
36. On the Misc page turn on If Outgoing mail arrives whilst online send immediately 5 Make an Out Mail entry to send outgoing mail via a SMTP relay server at 192 168 0 1 At Office 3 1 Create users called Louise Jane 2 Create an SMTPFWD DAT file with the entries Sarah 192 John 192 Philip 192 Martin 192 Karen 192 168 0 1 168 0 1 168 0 1 168 1 1 168 1 1 3 Make a Connection saying Connect Using LAN 4 On the Misc page turn on If Outgoing mail arrives whilst online send immediately 5 Make an Out Mail entry to send outgoing mail via a SMTP relay server at 192 168 0 1 Page 182 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Duplicate Messages If you are receiving more than one copy of your incoming email messages then there are a few possible reasons Duplicate Messages due to Mail Forwarding 183 Duplicate Messages In your ISP Mail Box 184 Duplicate Messages Due To Some Other Reason 184 Duplicate Messages due to Mail Forwarding If you have a registered domain name as well as a POP3 account at your ISP often mail will be forwarded from your registered domain name to your POP3 account by your ISP Let s say that you have a registered domain bibble gadgets com and a standard POP3 account of bibble megaisp net Often a message arriving to sarah bibble gadgets com will be forwarded by your ISP to bibble megaisp net without changing most of the message headers
37. Schedule option set VPOP3 will then connect to all In Mail and Out Mail configurations associated with those Connections Complex Schedule If the Simple Schedule isn t flexible enough for your needs you can define a Complex Schedule This allows you to define each individual connection time and indicate which Connections VPOP3 should use You can define a Complex Schedule either by modifying the SCHEDULE DAT file manually or by using the Schedule Property Page as described below There are advantages and disadvantages to both methods POP3 Settings EA ES Admir Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists In Mail Connection Out Mail Schedule Local Mail l Misc Local Servers C Manual Connection Connect from the menu Simple Schedule Define simple connection times below Complex Schedule Define a schedule in SCHEDULE DAT r ea sete ee emt nee le Default Outgoing Mail Threshold 11 Day Sunday Copy Cone A Primary Copy f Always Connect f Connect if waiting Time Hew Remove Edit File Reload File Each connection time is explicitly listed and can be different for each day You can also specify which Connections occur at each time Page 116 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office You choose the day you want to view edit in the Day drop down list and the Connections in the Conn drop
38. Select Log on using in Account name enter the user id you have defined for this user in VPOP3 in Password enter the password you have defined for this user in VPOP3 Leave Outgoing Mail Server my server requires authentication disabled Page 146 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Connection Tab paul Properties Choose Connect using my local area network LAN v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 147 VPOP3 Your email post office Advanced Tab paul Properties in Reo e Manm Seven anes seal aane a manaa TOT Seven inet alate Tron We eben here Leave Outgoing mail port as 25 Leave Incoming mail port as 110 Disable the This server requires a secure connection settings The other options can be set as you wish Page 148 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office LDAP with Microsoft Outlook 98 or Outlook Express Setting up the LDAP service in Outlook 98 or Outlook Express To set up Microsoft Outlook 98 or Outlook Express to use VPOP3 as an LDAP server go to the Tools menu in Outlook 98 or Outlook Express and choose Accounts Internet Accounts All he ail Director Service Connection i Remove a Bigfoot directory service l Ca Fourl1 directory service Properties a InfoSpace directory service Set as Default a InfoSpace Business directory service a Switchboard directory service Ca Verisign directory service Cad whol here directory service
39. To define the mailing list behaviour press the Mailing List Properties button Mailing List Properties This window allows you to set the properties for a Mailing List Hailing List Properties ki Ed Hame Faxlist l Custom Welcome Message Description M Allow Member Subscribe T Custom Unsubscribe Message I Inform Moderator of subscribes unsubscrbes nam Miderator of unsubecnbes only Moderated Message Posting Eqit elcome Message Eqit Unsubeenibe Message i Alou Members to post messages I Digest List M Allow Anyone to post messages ey are ee F SO Password Posting Posh Winest Esen as Ignore Bad Posts Keen Wigests Eor 25 Maps Confidential mE m ener Edit Headers Edit Signature Allow Members to get Member list Max Post Size 0 KE I Slow Posting not using BCC M Distribute Message To Message Sender Moderator paui Password Password OF Cancel Help The Description field maximum 40 characters is displayed to users who request a list of mailing lists supported by your installation Mailing List Subscription Unsubscription 95 Confidential Mailing Lists 96 Mailing List Remote Administration 98 Allow Members to get Member List 98 Slow Posting to Mailing List 98 Distribute Message To Message Sender 98 Mailing List Digests 99 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 93 VPOP3 Your email post office The Max Post Size option is available if the list is not moderated and sets
40. VPOP3 Socket Errors 226 VPOP3 Sounds 230 VPOP3 Status Window 69 VPOP3 with NT3 51 21 VPOP3 Won t Connect 120 VPOP3_ Security 206 VPOP3 s many other features 9 WAV files 230 Web Based Admiunistratio 214 Web Browser 40 65 Reading Mail using 40 65 Web Browser Message List 66 Web Browser User Settings 68 What is a Mapping 50 What s New 10 Windows Messaging 138 Windows NT 3 51 21 Windows NT reports an Out Of Buffers error after a while 229 Windows NT User Database Import 72 WinGate 228 WinProxy 228 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999
41. You can set a mailbox s AutoResponder to None Simple or External see AutoResponders for more details about AutoResponders The Edit Text button brings up an editor for the AUTORESPOND TXT file used with Simple AutoResponders and the Edit Command button brings up an editor for the AUTORESPOND CMD file used for External AutoResponders Normally when an AutoResponder is specified for a mailbox the mailbox does not receive a copy of messages which are responded to You can change this setting by using the Keep checkbox If this box is checked VPOP3 will place a copy of the message into the mailbox as well as responding to it Note it is possible to override the setting of the Keep flag within the AutoResponder itself Normally an AutoResponder will respond to all messages that mailbox receives In some situations such as when VPOP3 is set as a vacation responder on a mailbox normally used by a human this can cause loop problems where a couple of AutoResponders can talk to each other or AutoResponders respond to mailing list messages To get around this VPOP3 can keep track of which email addresses an AutoResponder has responded to so it will not respond to them again This facility is enabled by checking the Only Once option The log which VPOP3 keeps of which addresses have been responded to can be cleared by pressing the Clear button Finger Settings Finger Information is returned by VPOP3 when a finger program is use
42. a batch file for basic autoresponders to a PERL script or an executable program The External Autoresponder can be very flexible in what it does Calling it an Autoresponder is a bit simplistic as there is no reason it has to respond to the person who sent the message it could just as easily forward the message on to someone else or even run a mailing list This topic is really only meant for people who are moderately technical and are capable of writing simple programs using Perl or other scripting or programming languages If you require a specialised External Autoresponder and are unable to write one yourself we may be able to help but be aware that it will probably be charged for Contact VPOP3 Support for help There are also some free example External Autoresponder programs scripts that you can use on the VPOP3 Support web site or contact your dealer External AutoResponders use a similar method to CGI scripts as used on web sites for producing their results Defining an External AutoResponder Page 84 An External AutoResponder is an method of automatically creating responses to email messages by using an external program or script To define an External AutoResponder go to the Add Edit User window and select External AutoResponder and press the Edit Command button alternatively you can edit the AUTORESPOND CMD file in the user s mailbox directory The AUTORESPOND CMD file or the Command shou
43. a network rather than a single machine You can use this network address or choose your own third number of the address To go with this network address the complementary number is the Subnet Mask in this case the Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 Page 18 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Now you just need to assign a number between 1 and 254 0 means the network as described above and 255 signifies a broadcast address and put this in place of the 0 in your chosen network address It is best at this point to get a paper and pen and make a note of all the addresses you assign to ensure that you won t reuse an address if you add another PC in the future if you do reuse an address you ll spend many entertaining hours trying to work out why your network has stopped working This means that in our example the first PC could have the address 192 168 0 1 the second PC could have 192 168 0 2 Note All the machines on this network have a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 There is no need to run sequentially as long as the last number is unique you can use whichever number you want between 1 and 254 Therefore it is often useful to divide numbers into logical groups for instance numbers 1 10 might be Intranet servers 11 30 might be in one office 31 50 might be in another office etc Testing your TCP IP LAN Once you have set up at least two PCs with TCP IP support it is best
44. addresses tells VPOP3 what this email domain should be IF it is not otherwise specified by the sender This means that if we send a message to simon with the above configuration VPOP3 will append pscs co uk to the email address but if we send a message to philip brown com VPOP3 will leave the email address alone The Domain to add to unqualified addresses entry is also used for messages sent automatically by VPOP3 e g error messages or delivery receipts Route Local Mail Locally Page 42 The Route Local Locally checkbox tells VPOP3 whether messages sent to local domains should be routed internally or if they should always be sent out to the Internet NOTE If you have specified Local routing you can still specify individual Remote Users by using the REMOTE Mapping User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office If the Route Local Mail Locally option is enabled you can specify Local Mail Domains These are email domains which VPOP3 recognises as being local so any messages sent from a PC on your LAN to these addresses will be routed internally rather than being sent to the Internet This field does NOT affect incoming mail whether that is recognised is specified using the Accepted Domains field in the In Mail page Note that the Local Mail Domains setting supports simple wildcards for defining which email addresses are local If the Send local mail for unrecognised users to ISP option is enabled
45. button to remove that entry VPOP3 SMTP Client Connection Problem These errors occur during the period when VPOP3 is trying to establish a connection to your ISP s SMTP mail server to send outgoing mail They can mean that you have entered the SMTP Server address incorrectly or that there is a problem with the Dial up Networking or RAS connection settings or that your ISP s mail server is not working properly If the message text is SMTP Client not started Couldn t connect to server XXXX YY This means that VPOP3 was having a problem connecting to the lt B gt Mail Server lt B gt entry called XXXX Following this text there should be a further description of the specific error which occurred VPOP3 Socket Errors This list does not contain an exhaustive list of socket errors which VPOP3 can report as there are too many to list and most of them should never be encountered If you come across an error message which is not listed here contact VPOP3 support v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 225 VPOP3 Your email post office Socket Error 10047 Addresses in the specified family cannot be used with this socket This error only normally occurs during VPOP3 startup It normally means that TCP IP networking is not configured correctly on the PC which VPOP3 is running on Check the TCP IP configuration You may need to remove and reinstall TCP IP networking If you do this do the following sequence 1 Re
46. cix compulink co uk 6 Press the Routing button Choose According To Recipient Go to the Out Mail page 7 Choose the SMTP method 8 In SMTP Relay Servers type mail cix co uk Configuring VPOP3 for ClaraNet To configure VPOP3 for use with ClaraNet www clara net Go to the In Mail page 1 Choose the POP3 Incoming method 2 In POP3 Server Address type pop clara net 3 In User Id type your ClaraNet user name 4 In Password type your ClaraNet password 5 In Accepted Domains type lt account gt clara co uk lt account gt clara co uk 6 Press the Routing button and choose According To Recipient 7 In Special Header Fields type X RCPT Go to the Out Mail page 8 Choose the SMTP method 9 In SMTP Relay Servers type relay clara net Configuring VPOP3 for Freeserve To configure VPOP3 for use with Freeserve www freeserve net Go to the In Mail page 1 Choose the POP3 Incoming method 2 In POP3 Server Address type mail freeserve net 3 In User Id type account freeserve co uk where account is your Freeserve account name v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page II VPOP3 Your email post office 4 In Password type your Freeserve password 5 In Accepted Domains type lt aCCOuUnt gt i reeserve co uk lt account gt freeserve co uk 6 Press the Routing button and choose According To Recipient Go to the Out Mail page 8 Choose the SMTP method 9 In SMTP Relay Servers type mail fr
47. clients support LDAP eg Netscape Messaging 4 0 and Microsoft Outlook Express Mail HTTP server This is a basic message reader which can be used to read a user s waiting email messages using a web browser The Password Finger Admin HTTP Admin LDAP and Mail HTTP servers can be disabled if desired the other servers cannot because they are necessary for the proper functioning of VPOP3 The Port settings allow you to set the TCP IP port which each of these services operates on If you do not understand this just leave the settings at their defaults as they will be correct unless you are doing something unusual Allow Connections On The Allow Connections on settings allow you to specify which network interfaces you wish to allow the services to operate on This means you specify the IP address of the adapter which you want to allow incoming connections on If you are running a PC with both a LAN adapter and a Dial up Networking Adapter each of these adapters will have a different IP address If you want to limit connections to a single adapter enter the IP address of that adapter If you don t mind choose lt Any gt The most common use of this facility is to prevent access to VPOP3 from the Internet over the dial up connection In this case simply choose the IP address of your PC on the LAN in the Allow Connections On field Note you can also limit incoming connections by IP address as described here The U
48. defined above Page 136 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Press Advanced Configuration Options Winsock information settings Mot loaded m TCPIP timeout value masimum wait tine y Outgoing SMTP mail From fel 2 Hep e Use this Fron field to form the SMTP envelope k Send mail at once without placing in queue Use for all outgoing mail regardless of address r Send any mail in the queue during ide checks Incoming POPS mail Connect to POPS server on TCP port Do not download mall larger than oo EB Check for new POPS mail every bo secs idle Count messages when polling but don t download e Allow checks when WinPM ail is minimized e Delete mail from host once successfully retrieved Check whenever the new mail folder ig opened Download only unread mail WinSock information settings TCP IP Timeout value Leave at 30 Outgoing SMTP mail From Field Enter your email address Use this From Field to form the SMTP envelope Enable this Send Mail at Once without placing in queue Enable this Use in Preference to LAN mailer for Internet mail Enable this Use for all Outgoing mail regardless of address Usually you will disable this but in certain circumstances you will want to enable this Incoming POP3 mail Connect to POP3 server on TCP port Leave at 110 Delete mail from host once successfully retrieved Enable this this only deletes mail
49. defined by USERNAME will receive a notification message saying that the assistant has been changed Set Finger Plan using Mailer Daemon To set your Finger Plan by email send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Set Plan The message text should be the new Plan which you want to set Mailer_Daemon determines which user to change the Plan for by looking at the address that the message came From Set Forwarding Settings using Mailer Daemon To set your Forwarding Settings by email send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Set Forwarding The message text should contain the lines USERNAME lt username gt PASSWORD lt password gt FORWARD TO lt forwarding address gt or FORWARD OFF or FORWARD ON Use e FORWARD TO to set a new forwarding address and enable forwarding e FORWARD OFF to disable forwarding e FORWARD ON to enable forwarding with a previously defined forwarding address Note If the USERNAME entry does not match the sender of the message the user defined by USERNAME willl receive a notification message saying that the forwarding settings have been modified v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 213 VPOP3 Your email post office Remote Administration Listserver Commands If Remote Administration see Mailing List Properties is enabled for a list the moderator s can send messages to ListServer to add remove list members To start remote administration the message
50. during the import procedure Mapping Examples Here are some examples of how to use mappings The following example shows the different ways that different types of Mappings work Assume you have mappings of beth gt elizabeth bibble com gt joe fred bibble com gt fred bill bobble com gt william bobble com gt bob and on the In Mail page the Accepted Domains entry is wobble com If you receive an email addressed to beth wobble com elizabeth will receive a copy If you receive an email addressed to fred wobble com no one will receive a copy an administrator will get an error message If you receive an email addressed to beth bibble com joe will receive a copy If you receive an email addressed to fred bibble com joe and fred will receive a COpy If you receive an email addressed to bill bobble com william will receive a copy If you receive an email addressed to jim bobble com bob will receive a copy Sending mail for a sales address to your salesperson s own mailbox Or allowing user aliases for instance user jim may also have an email address james These are both examples of a simple alias operation To send a message sent to one address into another user s mailbox you would set up a simple mapping such as sales gt fred or james gt jim Page 202 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office
51. from you do this on the In Mail page f Pea 2 Demon POPS 3 Compuserve Out Mail Schedule l Local Mail Misc Local Servers Admir l Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Users l Mappings Lists In Mall Connection SW 1 Cl ce Remove HTF Incoming C VPOPS File ifer Addr 4 SMTP Mail Bot Mio E Freddy User lt New Password o To tell VPOP3 about a new ISP email account e Go to the Svr drop down list e Choose the lt New gt option to recreate a new configuration defining an ISP email account To remove email account details e Select the configuration you want to remove from the Svr drop down list e Press the Remove button Page 104 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Accepted Domains The Accepted Domains setting on the In Mail property page is very important for the correct operation of VPOP3 Puzzling message routing problems are often caused by incorrect settings of this parameter What should you set it to What the ACCEPTED DOMAINS setting is depends on what Internet email addresses you will receive messages for If you will receive messages for Your Email Addresses Accepted Domains Setting lt anyone gt yourcompany com company com j elliot yourisp com j elliot yourisp com lt anyone gt yourcompany isp c yourcompany isp com om and yourcompany isp com yourcompany isp com lt anyone gt yourcompany com yourcomp
52. full address e g simon subdomain mydomain com In this case any email sent to this address will be forwarded e a local address e g simon In this case any email sent to that person at your normal email domain will be forwarded e anentire email domain e g subdomain mydomain com In this case any email sent to anyone at the specified domain will be forwarded 66 In this case all email addresses at your normal email domain will be forwarded o In this case all otherwise undefined addresses at your normal email domain will be forwarded SMTP Server Address Page 222 The SMTP Server Address is the IP address or name of the SMTP server to which email for this person should be forwarded The SMTP Server Address can also include a port number by appending a followed by the port number for instance mysmtpserver 26 If a port number is not specified the standard SMTP port number 25 is assumed User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office New RCPT TO line The SMTP protocol uses an envelope which specifies who email messages are from and who they are intended for By default VPOP3 will put the Original Recipient name as the recipient address in the envelope However you can specify this explicitly if you wish The new recipient will either be a full email address such as browns subdomain mydomain com or only a new ema
53. junk email This is because as well as the small amount of extra processing time involved VPOP3 has to download the message header first of all and then download the whole message including the header again if the download rules say that the message should be downloaded Possible Download Rule Actions There are seven actions to perform on download rules Delete the message This deletes the message instantly and informs the intended recipient or the Main Administrator that this has happened Delete Silently This deletes the message instantly and doesn t tell anyone about it use with caution Ignore the message This just totally ignores the message apart from deleting it after the specified number of days for leaving mail on the server Download This will simply download the message as normal This is the default behaviour if no other rules match Download and Delete This will download the message as normal and then delete it immediately afterwards Ask to download This is a very useful option Here if a message matches the rule a copy of the header is sent to the intended recipient s with a message from Mailer_Daemon If the recipient replies to this message including the same subject line the message will get downloaded at the next connection The recipient can also request an immediate deletion of the message by responding with a message beginning with the word DELETE Otherwise the mess
54. need to be checked before being sent to the members of the mailing list In this case with VPOP3 the list will be sent to the moderator s when it is received and the moderator can check it s OK and then simply reply to the message if it s OK VPOP3 will then distribute that message to the mailing list members The moderator can also receive notifications that people have subscribed to or unsubscribed from the mailing list The moderator can also add or remove people from the mailing list themselves by using the Remote Mailing List Administration facility Mailing List Subscription Unsubscription If you want users to be able to join the list themselves by sending a subscribe message to ListServer the enable Allow Member Subscribe Users can always remove themselves from the list with an unsubscribe message If the moderator wants to receive a message whenever people join or remove themselves from the list use one of the following options v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 95 VPOP3 Your email post office Inform Moderator of subscribes unsubscribes sends a message to the moderator whenever someone joins or removes themselves from the list Inform Moderator of unsubscribes only sends a message whenever someone removes themselves from the list If the Allow Member Subscribe option is disabled the moderator will receive messages when someone tries to join themselves to the list so that the moderator can join them if they
55. of your username leave the Password field blank In this case the RPA software will supply the username amp password Unfortunately because of the way RPA works there is no way for VPOP3 to access more than one Compuserve mailbox using RPA as there is no way for VPOP3 to tell the RPA software to change usernames and passwords Configuring VPOP3 for MSN If you want to use VPOP3 with the Microsoft Network MSN you need to tell VPOPS3 to use the SPA authentication method SPA means Secure Passphrase Authentication and is a system specific to MSN To do this you first of all need to have installed the MSN authentication software on the computer running VPOP3 this software is normally installed when you install Outlook Express or other similar software in the POP3 Username box on the In Mail page put MSN lt username gt for instance MSN fred In the POP3 Password box put your MSN password Exchange Server You can use VPOP3 in conjunction with Microsoft Exchange Server and have VPOP3 download messages from one or more POP3 mailboxes and forward the messages on to Exchange Server over your network using LAN forwarding Installing Exchange Server amp VWPOP3 on the same computer The simplest way to do this is to run Exchange Server on one computer and VPOP3 on another computer This is because both VPOP3 and Exchange Server will by default want to install a TCP IP service on port 25 but only one program can instal
56. order Allow simple wildcard expansion single in Mappings Local Domains amp Accepted Domains Allow import export of mappings Put loop checks into local address expansion routines If Sender appears in a message header but not From copy Sender to From for Outlook peculiarity Allow creating plain text DSN error reports instead of the proper format for non conforming email clients set via registry What s new in VPOP3 VI1 2 9 Add List maintenance using Admin HTTP server In daily summary logs format message size totals using commas between thousands where applicable In daily summary logs allow configurable via registry account idle time Add Setup Helper Allow first user to be configured by the installer rather than defaulting to postmaster admin Add support for Import Export external addressbook Make HTTP mail viewer jump to start of message skipping message header Check for server disk space when sending receiving messages Try to support MSN authentication not fully tested yet feedback welcome Add ETRN support for Incoming SMTP mail Add Use LAN Forwarding to In Mail gt Routing window Add optional don t distribute to sender option for mailing lists Add Use LAN Forwarding to the user configuration options Improve error checking in Edit User window parameters Support alternate telephone numbers for RAS dialing via registry setting Add a ROUTING L
57. post office e If you are using Demon Internet www demon net as your ISP then you should enable the Demon POP3 Extensions option Don t enable this option otherwise Demon Internet have added some extensions ENV to their POPS server to allow software like VPOP3 to retrieve the SMTP envelope for a message this option tells VPOP3 to use those extensions e Other ISPs often add a custom field to their email headers called something like X IntendedRecipient or X Envelope To If you enter this field name in the Special Header Fields box VPOP3 will search for these fields before looking for the normal routing fields To and Cc You can enter more than one field here just enter them on different lines if your ISP uses different entries If VPOP3 finds one or more of these special fields it will not look for the normal routing fields but if it doesn t find any of the special fields it will look for the normal fields instead If your ISP supplies a field something like DeliveredTo account name domain and you only want VPOP3 to look at the name domain section you can also specify data in the Special Header Fields box In this case you would type DeliveredTo account i The indicates the portion of the data which VPOP3 should look at e The Use Received Fields checkbox indicates whether VPOP3 with search the Received fields for valid recipients This should normally be turned on Note that even if this is tu
58. post office AutoResponder STDERR Control File uu esscecsseccsscesesssseesecsssscsceseesecsscesseesescscees 88 Command Line Parameters 173 Creating an External Router 174 Diagnostics Property Page 175 Disable InMail methods using Mailer Daemon qu esssesssceceseecescsceseesecesesseeseescenees 176 Distributed Sites using VPOP3 177 Distributed Sites using Hierarchical Servers eessessesessssesesessesesessssesesessosesessesesessoseses 77 Distributed Sites Using REMOTE Mappings sosessesessssesesessssesesessesesessosesessesesessoseses 179 Distributed Sites Using Subsidiary Mail Accounts 0 0 eeeessssececeeeecececeeescceeeessesceees 180 Distributed Sites Using LAN Forwarding cccssscccssscssscssesscescssscsscscsssssceesecseeeseees I8 Duplicate Messages 183 Duplicate Messages due to Mail Forwarding scsssssscssssssssssscscsssssssessecesesceeseesceees 183 Duplicate Messages In your ISP Mail Box uu esesesssececeeessscesecsecsceceesessceceeeessesceeenses 184 Duplicate Messages Due To Some Other Reason esessssecesseceesscsseesscesesseeeeeceeees 184 Edit AUtOres ponse COMM Al dassies a een EEE TE 184 Enable InMail methods using Mailer Daemon ssssssesessssesesessesesesessesesessosesesesseseseses 185 ENV Goinmand ENTO S vicscsiadectsevzcs cavsmsesostencesesvanscessttoeasessssenenssecotees eousdhondevacasedeeneeseszenadiass 185 ECN 0 0 a E A ar es 185 Post Connect and Pre Disconnect
59. property page validation for some common configuration errors e Add Forwarding Lists functionality to LISTS page e Automatically set new username passwords from RAS phonebook where possible e Allow scanning of Received message headers in reverse order ie bottom to top instead of top to bottom e Allow importing of Forwarding Lists from a text file useful for distributed sites e Add MX Routing direct sending option for outgoing mail e Allow deleting of multiple external address book entries at once e Allow global header modifiers for all outgoing messages e Allow configurable timeouts for all VPOP3 extensions e Add Copy Message and Hold Message to queue browser e Support company name faxnumber localdomain format of addressing for FAXmaker for VPOP3 e Handle RESENT header fields e Alter MAIL FROM on forwarded messages so it appears to be sent from a local address for some ISP anti relay filters e Global sigs amp mailing list sigs will be added to multipart MIME HTML text messages correctly now e Enhance the Received header fields e Strip multiple mailing list sigs e Log online time to CONNECT LOG What s new in VPOP3 VI 2 7 e The HTTP Admin server now includes a status page e Allow the option of showing idle accounts accounts with mail older than 24 hours in the daily summary log e Allow you to ban members from mailing lists e Add External a
60. read only in the Edit User window 2 Put the user s password in the Password box This password is used for logging into VPOP3 to read your mail or if an administrator wants to reconfigure it 3 Optionally select the user s group from the Group box You can use this as a purely informational setting or to define standard settings for different groups of people 4 Check the Administrator box if you want this person to be able to configure VPOP3 Advanced User settings 1 Enter the user s Assistant if any in the Assistant box This can either be a mailbox name or an external email address This is discussed in the Assistants topic If you have chosen an assistant you can check the Send Only To Assistant box if you want VPOP3 to send mail only to the assistant and not leave the mail in the user s mailbox otherwise the message is copied to the assistant and left in the mailbox as well Note You can also set clear the assistant by email by sending messages to the Mailer_Daemon user or by using a web browser see Mail HTTP Server v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 51 VPOP3 Your email post office 2 Youcan also enter a Forwarding Address in the Forward To box This should be an external email address If you enter an address here the messages will be forwarded to that address and NOT placed in the user s mailbox If an Assistant is set as well the assistant is processed first and if the Send Only To A
61. send another message to Michael you will not receive another copy of this automated email A price list autoresponder e This responds to a message to pricelist yourdomain com with a price list The price list will vary depending on the subject text of the incoming message e An incoming subject containing the word electronic will respond with a price list of electronic goods e An incoming subject containing the word food will respond with a price list of food items v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 83 VPOP3 Your email post office e Ifthe incoming subject doesn t contain either of those words it will respond with a brief help message e Note that the actual price lists are included from external files this allows you to generate the price lists externally without having to rewrite the autoresponder for every price change Thank you for your price list request Section electronic Our Electronic Goods pricelist follows lt Include c prices electronic txt gt Section food Our Food pricelist follows lt Include c prices food txt gt Default To request a specific price list send another message to this address but specify either Food or Electronic in your message Subject All If you want further help send an email to helpme External AutoResponders A VPOP3 External Autoresponder is a program which is called when a message is sent to a mailbox This program can be anything from
62. set of property pages for the entry you are configuring There are three property pages Personal Details FredBloggs Entry Ei ES Personal Business Details Business Address Display Name FreaBloggs Email Address fred acl com Mame Fred B Bloggs Address Phone f 23 456 7890 Fas f 23 456 7091 Kd ohile 287 123 4567 Cancel Help Enter the personal details of the address book entry here You can leave any unneeded fields blank except for Display Name and Email Address v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 189 VPOP3 Your email post office Business Details FredBloggs Entry ki Ed Personal Business Details Business Address Job Title Floor Sweeper OO Department Housekeeping Oifice Cupboard 17 O Phone 123 66333661234 Fax Po Pager PO URL http wwwbroomsrus com Cancel Help Enter the business details here You can leave any unwanted fields blank Business Address FredBloggs Entry Ei Ed Personal Business Details Busness Address Company Cleaners A Us Fost tuddrese 15 Cedarwood Park Sutherly City Liteon State Po Postal Code 2031724 Country Zibblelaad Cancel Help Enter the business address of your address book entry here You can leave any unwanted fields blank VCF File Support VCEF files are electronic business cards often sent as email attachments VPOP3 currently has a very basic support for importing VCF f
63. single mailbox or distribution or mailing list This is useful if someone has a personal email account which they want to use with VPOP3 or if you have several POP3 accounts each of which is dedicated to a single user Attempt to work with a single email address by detecting text name or comment if possible This option can be useful if your ISP account doesn t support multiple email addresses If this option is selected VPOP3 will try to find a mailbox name in the text portion of the recipient address Page 106 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Search Subject for Here VPOP3 will search the subject line of incoming messages looking for a special bit of text Forward to another LAN Mail Server This option tells VPOP3 to use LAN forwarding to send all the downloaded messages to another SMTP email server on your network This option should only be used if all downloaded mail is for a single user if it is for many users use the According to Recipient option and the SMTPFWD DAT file Attempt to Remove Duplicated Messages This option tells VPOP3 that you wish it to attempt to remove duplicated messages Sometimes your ISP may place multiple copies of mail messages in its mailbox if a message arrives to more than one person at your site For instance if a message is sent to jim company com and bob company com the ISP may put a copy for jim and a copy for bob in the same mailbox VPOP3 will
64. that the the connection between VPOP3 and your ISP s POP3 mail server was closed when VPOP3 did not expect it to be This can be caused by the dial up connection failing or a bug in the ISP s mail server which drops the connection in abnormal circumstances Following this text there should be a further description of the specific error which occurred If the message text is The VPOP3 POP3 Client XXXX YY has encountered an error whilst retrieving messages from your ISP POP3 server The received error was ZZZZZ The Last command sent by VPOP3 was WWWWWWWwW This means that your ISP s POP3 mail server returned an unexpected error response when VPOP3 sent a command 95 of the time these errors are caused by problems with or bugs in your ISP s mail server so we recommend that you contact your ISP if the situation is not mentioned below e Ifthe last command sent by VPOP3 was ENV xxx this is probably because you have told VPOP3 to use Demon POP3 extensions but your ISP does not support them most don t so go to the In Mail page in VPOP3 press the Routing button and disable the Use Demon POP3 Extensions option e Ifthe last command sent by VPOP3 was USER this can mean that you have mistakenly created a second In Mail configuration in VPOP3 Go to the In Mail page using the Svr drop down list choose the second or later entry and find the one which does not have a User Id entry press the Remove
65. that your Mappings Assistants and Lists wouldn t cause the message to be copied If it isn t any of these settings we will need to see copies of at least two of the duplicate messages arriving for the same user along with all their message headers to determine what may be happening Note Software like Microsoft Outlook and Windows Messaging removes the message headers before showing the messages to the user In this case you may need to get the message files directly from VPOP3 If you go to the Diagnostics Property Page and turn on the Keep Temporary Files option VPOP3 will keep all messages if you receive duplicate messages the files will be stored with filenames Dxxxxxx DAT in the user s mailbox Find the files with the correct receive date time and check their contents before sending them to us If you do this lots of disk space will be used you may have to periodically delete all files called D DAT from the VPOP3 directory and subdirectories Edit Autoresponse Command If you are going to run an External Autoresponder then you need to tell VPOP3 what software to run to produce the response message You can edit the command from the Users gt Edit gt Edit Command sequence Page 184 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Edit Autoresponse Command Ei Command dt Sperbinperl exe autosub pl Browse OF Cancel This window lets you type in the program which should be run as the exte
66. the From address in the subscription message If Subscribe or Unsubscribe are called ListServer may also send a message to the moderator about it if that was specified in the mailing list options This message will appear to have been sent by the originator of the Subscribe or Unsubscribe command so the moderator can respond easily to the request Notes 1 Messages to ListServer are queued and processed as a background task This may mean that it can take a few seconds to generate the response or longer if there are lots of requests 2 Subscribe and Unsubscribe requests require exclusive access to the VPOP3 properties Therefore if the property pages are open ListServer will postpone processing these commands until the property pages are closed Page 102 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office VPOP3 Information The Info Property Page The Info property page simply tells you the version and licensing details of your copy of VPOP3 lt WPOPS Settings If you click on one of the blue links VPOP3 will start either your email client or your web browser and point it to the right place Note depending on your dealer you may only have one or no blue links v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 103 VPOP3 Your email post office Using Multiple ISP Email Accounts VPOP3 lets you access many different ISP email accounts You need to tell VPOP3 about each account you want VPOP3 to download
67. the Connection tab Internet Hail Connect using the network Choose this option Work off line and use Remote mail Disable this Occasionally you may want to enable this but usually you will not v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 139 VPOP3 Your email post office Press Schedule Schedule When not using Remote Mail Check for new messages even minutefs Cancel Help The number you enter in Check for new messages every is how often the Internet Mail service will poll VPOP3 for new messages NOT how often you will connect to the Internet that is configured in VPOP3 Outlook Express Choose the Tools Accounts from the menu e To add a new Mail Account press Add and go here e To edit an existing account press Edit and look here Outlook Express Add Account After pressing Add in the Outlook Express Accounts list you should get the windows below Internet Connection Wizard Your Name When you send e maill your name will appear in the From field of the outgoing message Type yourname as you would like it to appear Display name Paul Smith For example Jahn Smith 4 Back Nest gt In Display Name enter your name as you want it to be displayed in the From field of messages you send Page 140 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Press Next to define your email address Internet Connection Wizard Internet E mail Address
68. the SOCKS proxy details at the bottom of this window 6 Go to the Users Page and define your local users 7 Go to the Schedule Page and define your connection schedule Configure inward SMTP feed If you will be receiving your email by it being delivered using SMTP follow the instructions on this page for basic configuration details Any settings which are not mentioned below you can leave as they are originally or set them to other values you prefer Dial up connection to the Internet 1 Go to the Connection Page a Choose Use RAS for Connection b Enter the details for your dial up connection in the RAS Details section Note you should have configured and tested a Windows dial up session first a Check Use with Simple Schedule 2 Go to the In Mail Page Choose SMTP Incoming In Wait for up to lt n gt seconds for an incoming connection enter a number like 60 or more This tells VPOP3 to wait for an incoming SMTP connection before deciding that there is no mail waiting to be delivered If you leave this at zero VPOP3 will connect to the Internet and immediately hang up if there is no outgoing mail to be sent In Use Connections select the connection you defined above 3 Go to the Out Mail Page v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 35 VPOP3 Your email post office Choose SMTP Enter the name of your ISP s SMTP server in the SMTP Relay Servers box 4 Go to the Local Mail Page In Domain to Add to Unqualifie
69. the main office office 1 in the above example and have mappings of those autoresponder list names to REMOTE at any other offices to mean that messages to those addresses are ignored by sites apart from the main office It may also be worth setting up Download Rules to prevent messages only for remote users being downloaded from the ISP in order to save telephone costs User Message Forwarding The User Forwarding address is an external email address which receives an email message instead of VPOP3 placing the messageinto user s mailbox This differs from an Assistant in that the message can be placed in the user s mailbox as well as being sent to an Assistant You set the forwarding address on the User gt Add Edit window by entering the forwarding address into the Forward To box v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 59 VPOP3 Your email post office The User Forwarding address can be useful if a user is going to be out of the office and wants to be able to receive their email at a remote site or in their personal email account Monitoring Messages It is possible to monitor incoming outgoing and internal messages for some all or no users When messages are monitored it simply means that a copy of the message is sent to the Monitor Target mailbox as well as being sent to the destination mailbox or address User Groups What are User Groups User Groups are a method of grouping users with similar characteristics togeth
70. then download these messages and see To jim company com bob company com in the message header so it will normally send each copy of the message to both users meaning that each users gets two copies of the message If you enable this option VPOP3 will compare various key header fields of each message and if they are the same it will decide that the messages are duplicates so it will only send a single copy to the recipients The header fields which are compared are e From e Date e Subject e Message Id Routing According To Recipient This routing option means that VPOP3 will search the message headers for fields which define the message recipient These are fields such as e To e Ce e Apparently To e Received e Resent To e Resent Cc When VPOP3 finds a recipient address it will check to see if that recipient is meant for your site by comparing it with the Accepted Domains list If the recipient is for your site it will look at the part before the of the address and send the message to the appropriate mailbox es This method is quite reliable but there are certain circumstances mainly to do with mailing lists when it can fail To get around this many ISPs have extended their POPS service to help you find who a message was really intended for VPOP3 can work with these extensions to make incoming message routing more reliable v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 107 VPOP3 Your email
71. timeout 60 seconds should be fine Network timeout 60 seconds should be fine Network Buffer Size 4096 bytes should be fine Cache Network Info Leave this turned on Automatically dial amp hangup This must be turned off VPOP3 does all the dialling and hanging up Note that you can use Eudora to change your mailbox password Choose Special Change Password from the menus v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 131 VPOP3 Your email post office LDAP with Eudora 4 Setting up the LDAP service in Eudora Pro 4 To set up Eudora Pro 4 to use VPOP3 as an LDAP server go to the Tools menu in Eudora and choose Directory Services Directory Services OF x ave a Status Ready Hew Database Databases Configured Servers CIES Qualcomm O D Qualcomm Finc O LE ldap bigfoot cor O LE dap witchboa O LE ldap fourd 1 cor O LE ldap infospace L LE Idapbiz infospen_ L LE ldap whowhere dig Ce Ece Keep On Top Directory Services T Filter Report In the Protocols list select LDAP and press New Database Page 132 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Go to the Network tab H odify Database 192 168 57 1 1 In Type the name by which you would like to refer to this server type VPOP3 or Local or whatever name you want to use 2 In Host Name type the IP address of the VPOP3 server 3 In Port you will normally want to leave this as 3
72. to start testing it as you go along The basic way of doing this is by using the PING tool which comes with Windows 95 and Windows NT PING basically sends a short message a ping from one machine to another the target machine responds and the first machine tells you that it has got a response and how long the message took So if you ve just set up machines with IP addresses 192 168 0 1 and 192 168 0 2 you would type PING 192 168 0 1 in a DOS box on the machine with address 192 168 0 2 You should get a response something like Pinging 192 168 0 1 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 32 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 32 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 32 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 32 If you do get a response like this all is well Any other response means that something is wrong Check physical network connections first then panic Every time you configure a new machine you should check that you can PING the same machine so always check that you can PING the first machine you set up This way if all machines can PING a single machine it is very likely that all machines can PING each other as well Choosing the VPOP3 Server The next job is to choose which machine will be the VPOP3 server if you haven t done so already The only requirements are e It must be running Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 or with Windows NT
73. variables will be set by VPOP3 REPLY TO The Reply To address of the incoming message ORIGINATOR The originator of the incoming message SUBJECT The subject of the incoming message RCPTx A recipient of the incoming message there may be more than one RCPTx entry if there are more than one local recipients They will be numbered RCPT1 RCPT2 etc Note Messages for external routing will be queued and processed in the background one at a time so it may take longer for incoming messages to be placed in users mailboxes The PC running VPOP3 will also have more of a performance load since external programs will be run in the background after downloading messages Note If the external router wants to modify the incoming message it should discard the incoming message by sending To None to STDOUT and then send a new message with the new contents Page 174 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Diagnostics Property Page Because VPOP3 is so complex it has diagnostics logging built in Normally it will only log errors or major events but you can increase the level of logging detail if you are having difficulties and the log files may let you see what is going wrong or the author might ask to see copies of the log files You set the diagnostics configuration on the Diagnostics property page lt VPOPS Settings Ei EI Connection In Mail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Users Mappings
74. who are allowed to configure VPOP3 have physical access to the VPOP3 server you can make access to the properties pages a lot easier by configuring the AUTO LOGON facility Enabling Auto Logon 1 Log on to the VPOP3 properties using the administrator s name which you want to use for the AUTO LOGON 2 Go to the Admin page 3 Check the AUTOMATIC LOGON PASSWORD box and type in the password for the current administrator From now on when you choose Properties from the VPOP3 menu you will immediately be taken to the properties page without having to enter a password Disabling Auto Logon To disable AUTO LOGON in the future uncheck the AUTOMATIC LOGON PASSWORD box on the ADMIN page Shutting Down VPOP3 There are three ways of shutting down VPOP3 1 Log on to the VPOP3 Properties go to the Admin Property Page and press the Shutdown button 2 Right Click on the VPOP3 Menu and choose Shutdown 3 Execute VPOP3 Shutdown from a batch file command line or Explorer Note Option 2 can be disabled by the administrator on the Misc Property Page using the Allow Shutdown from Menu option This will mean that only administrators can shut down VPOP3 Page 170 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Internet Mail Protocols There are currently two main Internet Email Protocols SMTP and POP3 there are several other mail protocols eg UUCP and IMAP4 which are currently less widely used and aren t cur
75. wish Note If Allow Member Subscribes is disabled the Inform Moderator of subscribes unsubcribes option must normally be enabled see Confidential lists for the only exception Messages to joining leaving list members Whenever a user joins or leaves a mailing list using the ListServer they will receive a message confirming the action You can customise these messages If Custom Welcome Message is enabled you can create a custom welcome message for when people subscribe to the mailing list If it is not enabled a standard basic welcome message is sent Similarly if Custom Unsubscribe Message is enabled you can send a custom farewell message when people leave the mailing list Confidential Mailing Lists Page 96 If you make a mailing list Confidential then the mailing list will NOT be placed in the list reported by ListServer if someone asks for a list of mailing lists This does not stop someone subscribing to the list by email if they know the list name You should disable the Allow Member Subscribe option if you don t want to allow this Note If you disable both the Allow Member Subscribe and Inform Moderator of Subscribes Unsubscribes options for a confidential list anyone attempting to subscribe to the list by email will be told that the list does not exist User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Import Forwarding Lists On the Lists page you can press the Import Forwar
76. with a list stored on your hard disk Any messages which are available on the server and not in its own list it will download Any messages which are not on the server VPOP3 will remove from its local list Some ISPs will sometimes not return a full list of messages each time VPOP3 connects this would mean that it would re download some messages the next time it connects and gets the full list again To get around this ISP problem VPOP3 can now store the message identifiers UIDLs for several days after the ISP has said that they are not available This option just tells VPOP3 how long to keep these old identifiers 3 days is normally a sensible value but you may need to increase this amount if your ISP is particularly bad in this area Query Download Delay This option tells VPOP3 how long to keep messages which are the subject of an Ask download rule By default this is 14 days but your situation may require that you increase or decrease this delay Increasing this value will increase mailbox usage on the ISP server and decreasing it may mean that messages are deleted for the Ask query can be responded to so think carefully before changing this value Report Bad Listserver Messages to Default User If you choose this option then messages to ListServer which contain no valid commands will be copied to the default user as well as the error message being sent to the sender VPOP3 File Transfer Method If you want to dial in to a V
77. 00 211 Admin 211 Connection 25 Diagnostics 176 Headers 200 In Mail 28 Info 99 Lists 85 Local Mail 38 Local Servers 40 Logging 167 Mappings 50 Out Mail 42 Users 44 45 Property Page Misc 206 Proxy 25 228 Conflicts with 228 SOCKS 26 Proxy Firewall SOCKS 206 Query Assistant by Email 210 Query Download Delay 219 Queue Browser 71 RAS 25 27 Detecting a connection 27 Reading mail using a web browser 40 65 Reading Message using a Web Browser 66 Receiving Mail using SMTP 101 Redirect Rule 161 Redirecting Messages 50 Refuse SMTP Connections from 218 Registration 99 Registry Tweaks 221 Relay Servers 42 Remote Access Service 25 219 Remote Administration 172 Remote Administration Listserver Commands 98 Remote Administration of Mailing Lists 97 Remote Configuration 172 Remote Users 56 219 Remove Postmaster User 49 Remove SPAM emails 161 Responding Automatically to Messages 74 Response Definition Tags 78 Restricting Server Access 169 Route Local Mail Locally 38 Route with a Single Email Address 63 108 Routing 29 38 106 107 108 109 192 Routing According To Recipient 29 107 Routing According To the Message Subject 109 Routing Problems 105 v 1 3 0 May 1999 Rules based Downloading 161 Running an External program when email arrives 80 Running VPOP3 174 Schedule Property Page 115 116 SCHEDULE DAT File Format 117 Scheduling Connections 115 116 Security 40 Secu
78. 0047 Addresses in the specified family cannot be used with this socket 226 Socket Error 10048 Specified Address Already in Use essssssecesessssssesececsssesesesesecsessseseeecnensseaees 226 Socket Error 10049 The specified address is not available from the local computer 000 226 Socket Error 10054 The virtual circuit was reset by the remote end s ssssssesssssssesssessesssesssessessee 226 Socket Error 10060 Operation Timed Out sssecscscscecscscecssececesesesesesessssssesssesssssesesesessseseseesseseeeeees 226 Socket Error 10061 The attempt to connect was forcefully rejected oe esesecesesseseeeseseseeeeeceeeees 227 Socket Error O50 3 ING More Data esea SAA 227 Socket Error 1001 Host not found authoritative answer ssessessssessssessesresressesseoseoseeseessessessessess 227 Using VPOP3 on the same machine as a Proxy Server ss ssessessssssessssssesssesseesseeseessseosersseoseesseosersseeseeee 227 VPOP3 slows stops when transferring large messages s ssesessssesesssresesesseresesessesess 228 Windows NT reports an Out Of Buffers error after a While csseseceeeeeeees 229 Sounds 230 Index 231 Page 8 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Introduction to VPOP3 VPOP3 is a Virtual POP server It is designed for connections where your ISP gives you a single POP3 mailbox which contains mail for lt anyone gt lt address gt so a si
79. 1 In Domain to Add to Unqualified Addresses enter your email domain e g mycompany com 2 Enable Route Local Mail Locally 3 In Local Mail Domains enter your email domain e g mycompany com 7 Go to the Schedule Page and define your connection schedule Permanent or Proxy connection to the Internet 1 Go to the Connection Page 1 Choose Use LAN for Connection 2 Check Use with Simple Schedule 3 Ifyou are connecting through a SOCKS proxy check the Connect Through SOCKS Server option You may need to go to step 5 and come back here later 2 Go to the Users Page and define your local users 1 Add your users for this example add user1 and user2 3 Go to the In Mail Page 1 Choose POP3 Incoming 2 In POP3 Server Address enter the name of your ISP s POP3 server e g pop3 isp com 3 In POP3 User ID enter your mailbox account name e g userl_mycompany Page 38 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 9 VPOP3 Your email post office In POP3 Password enter your mailbox account password this is usually the same as your dial up connection password In Accepted Domains type the email address which this POP3 account handles e g userl mycompany com In Use Connections select the connection you defined in 1 above Press the Routing button to get to the RoutingPage a Select Always Send To and choose useri from the drop down list b Press OK In the Svr drop down list choose lt New gt This creates a second
80. 117 120 161 169 176 188 196 199 202 213 223 LCK 197 OLD 197 A DAT 197 198 ADMINALLOWED DAT 196 AR DAT 81 83 198 AUTORESPOND LOG 198 AUTORESPONSE CTL 81 196 AUTORESPONSE TXT 81 196 BOUNCE MSG 213 CONNECT NOW 120 D DAT 176 197 198 DLRULES DAT 161 162 196 ERRORS LOG 196 HEADER CEFG 198 HQ DAT 198 I DAT 198 LDAP ATR 188 LIST CFG 198 LS DAT 198 LS _HELP TXT 97 196 LS_LISTS TXT 97 196 LS SUB TXT 97 196 LS _UNSUB TXT 97 196 MAILBOX MAP 196 MD DAT 197 ML DAT 197 NEXTUIDL DAT 196 POLLTIME DAT 196 POP3ALLOWED DAT 169 POP3CLT LOG 176 197 POP3SVR LOG 176 197 POPIN TMP 196 Q DAT 197 R DAT 81 198 SCHEDULE DAT 116 117 197 SMTPALLOWED DAT 169 170 SMTPCLT LOG 176 197 SMTPSVR LOG 176 197 SRVRUIDL DAT 197 SVRUIDLx DAT 197 USER LST 197 USER TXT 203 USERINFO TXT 198 199 USERLIST LST 197 USERPLAN TXT 199 VPOP LOG 176 197 VPOP3INST DAT 196 WELCOME MSG 198 Filtering Messages 161 Finger 199 210 215 Set Plan by Email 215 Finger Server 40 199 215 FireDoor 228 Forcing VPOP3 to Connect 120 Forward To 56 210 215 Forwarding Messages 166 210 215 223 Query User Forwarding by Email 210 Set User Forwarding by Email 215 v 1 3 0 May 1999 To Another SMTP Server on the LAN 223 Freeserve 111 From Mappings 50 Generally available ListServer commands 97 Global Address Book 72 114 189 Global Header Modifiers 62 Global Net 112 Glob
81. 138 140 152 Email Clients 121 127 132 135 136 138 140 149 151 152 158 Calypso 158 Eudora 127 129 Microsoft Exchange Client 138 Microsoft Internet Mail 121 126 Microsoft Outlook 138 Microsoft Outlook 98 149 151 Microsoft Outlook Express 140 149 Microsoft Windows Messaging 138 Netscape Messenger 4 152 Outlook Express 140 Pegasus Mail 136 Email control of user account 203 Email Domains 105 Email Forwarding 56 92 166 210 215 EmailClientConfig 121 Enable InMail methods by Email 186 ENV Command Errors 186 Environment Variables 80 81 Error 228 10048 228 Error Messages 105 225 There was incoming mail with no recipients 105 ETRN 102 Eudora 56 127 132 135 Event Sounds 230 Example Simple Autoresponders 79 Exchange Client 138 Exchange Server 113 Exiting VPOP3 170 211 Exploding of Email Addresses 208 Export Member List 95 Export User List 73 Exporting Users 59 Extensions 186 187 External Address Book 72 114 External AutoResponders 80 82 83 172 185 Environment Variables 82 STDERR Control File 172 STDIN Input File 83 STDOUT Output File 83 External LDAP Address Book 114 189 External LDAP Address Book Entry 190 External Routing 175 186 192 193 External Users 52 55 Fax Server mailbox 218 Features 9 File Attachments 195 File Import Export 72 Files VPOP3 Uses 46 74 80 81 83 97 116 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office
82. 3 It is this service which allows email client software to retrieve email SMTP server This is another key component of VPOP3 It is this service which allows email client software to send email Password server This is a simple service which allows users to change their password settings either manually through Telnet or by using an email client such as Eudora Finger server Finger is a simple protocol used for finding out basic details about a person It is possible to use this service to see if there is email waiting for a user Admin server This is a custom text protocol allowing basic remote administration of VPOP3 Currently only certain VPOP3 configuration options can be managed using this protocol You should access this remote administration facility using a TELNET program Page 44 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office HTTP Admin Server This is a remote administration facility which can be accessed using a web browser program Not all VPOP3 configuration options can be managed using this protocol but the most commonly used are LDAP server LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is anew method of having a centralised address book directory VPOP3 has a basic LDAP server which will allow you to search and retrieve the userid email address and group of VPOP3 users See your email client documentation for how to access LDAP directories Note generally only the most modern email
83. 3 directory on the server For instance this would be Server VPOP3 if the server has shared the VPOP3 directory with the name VPOP3 On the In Mail page choose the user s you want to transfer messages from the Server to this PC On the Local Mail page you will generally want to turn off Route Local Mail Locally so that all outgoing mail is sent to the Server VPOP3 User Manual Page 219 VPOP3 Your email post office Registry Tweaks You can change certain VPOP3 settings by editing the Windows Registry To apply these changes you must close VPOP3 make the changes restart VPOP3 These settings are ones which you will normally not need to change but you may want to change in special circumstances General Registry Settings To make these changes you must use RegEdit and find the key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE PaulLSmith VPOP3 Secret then edit or create the values below UseESMTP DWORD 1 default attempt to log on to ISP SMTP servers or other LAN SMTP servers using ESMTP first SMTP if the ESMTP fails 0 don t attempt to log on using ESMTP just use SMTP AllowRemoteFaxAccess DWORD 0 default don t allow non local users access to the fax mailbox when using the telephone number domain method 1 do allow access SummaryLogIdleTime DWORD default 1 number of days to use when reporting Idle mailbox accounts on the Daily Summary Log POP3DiskSpaceSpare DWORD default 5 number of MB wh
84. 8 LDAP ATR file 188 Leave Mail On Server 28 Licence Details 99 Lists 85 86 Adding Editing 85 86 Admins 86 Everyone 85 86 Nesting 86 No one 86 ListServer 91 ListServer Operation 97 Local Mail 38 Local Routing 38 105 Local Servers 40 199 Finger 199 Log Files 176 177 Logging 167 176 177 Logging Facilities 167 Logon Administrator 170 Auto 170 Mail Forwarding 52 Mail HTTP Server 41 65 Mail Routing 38 Mail Servers 28 102 Mailbox Mapping 36 50 Mailboxes 44 Mailer Daemon Control Messages 203 210 215 Mailing List 86 ban member 87 suspend member 87 Mailing Lists 50 85 88 90 94 95 97 Administration 98 Configuring 88 Digests 94 Header Modifiers 95 ListServer 97 Message Headers 95 Moderated Message Posts 94 Moderating 88 90 94 97 98 Properties 88 Subscribing 88 97 Unsubscribing 88 97 Maintain User Groups 59 majordomo 97 Making VPOP3 Connect 120 Mapping Examples 203 Mappings 50 51 203 Description 50 Menu 20 120 Menu Dialling 120 Message 28 29 33 36 56 107 161 184 Bouncing 211 Duplicates 184 Page 234 Filtering 161 Forwarding 56 From Mailing List 36 Routing 28 30 34 35 106 107 108 109 Size Limits 28 Message Headers for Mailing Lists 95 Message Sections 75 Messages to Multiple Recipients 64 Microsoft Exchange Client 138 Microsoft Exchange Server 113 Microsoft Internet Mail 121 Microsoft Networking 219 Microsoft Outl
85. 89 4 VPOP3 does not require you to log on v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 133 VPOP3 Your email post office Go to the Search Options tab Modify Database Change the Search Timeout to 1 or 2 minutes Change the Maximum number of matches to return to 100 Change the Search base to lt blank gt Press OK PON Page 134 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Using the LDAP service in Eudora Pro 4 When you have set up Eudora you go to the Tools menu in Eudora and choose the Directory Services option Director Services JOf wp Status Ready Last found 4 fonatipses co uk LE fred fredi pscs co uk VPOPS LE fan fanipcs co uk VPOPS mikek nfosource com SS Finger Hew Database Databases Configured Servers OE Qualcomm O B Qualcomm Finc O LE ldap bigfoot cor O LE ldap witchboa O LE ldap fourd 1 cor LJ LE ldap infospace L LE Idapbiz infospar pE VPOR3 bE Idan whawhe GE fred Email w fred pscs co uk User Modify Delete r LH Directory Services _ Address Book ES Fitter Report 1 Select the directory service you added in the Databases list at the bottom right of the Directory Services window 2 Type in your query normally a substring search in the Query box 3 Press Start to do the search v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 135 VPOP3 Your email post office Pegasus
86. A simple schedule has the following limitations e The schedule must be the same for each day on which it is active e The connection times must be equally spaced e Only Connections defined as Use With Simple Schedule will be used e The connections must take place between two different whole hour times which can straddle midnight if you wish To define a simple schedule you must v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page I15 VPOP3 Your email post office e Define the days on which the schedule is active this can be any combination of days Monday to Sunday The buttons Weekdays and Every Day simply check all the appropriate days e Define the hours between which you want the schedule to run For instance a business might only want to collect mail between 8 00 am and 6 00pm there is often no point collecting mail at midnight since no one will be able to read it until they arrive in the morning e Define two connection periods 1 The frequency at which VPOP3 must Always Connect At these times VPOP3 will connect and send and receive any messages whether or not there is any mail waiting to be sent 2 The frequency at which VPOP3 must connect if a certain number of messages are waiting to be sent Note that at these times VPOP3 will collect any incoming mail as well as sending the outgoing waiting messages Note At times defined by a simple schedule VPOP3 will connect to all Connections which have the Use With Simple
87. Address paul pses co uk Servers Outgoing Mail SMTP 132 168 57 1 Incoming Mail POPS f 92 168 571 POPS Account paul Password E Advanced Settings Caneel ay Name Set this to the user s real name Organization Set this to your company name or leave blank Email Address Set this to your Internet or local email address Servers section Outgoing Mail SMTP Enter the IP address of your VPOP3 server If you have set it up on a LAN you should have made a note of the IP address If you are running it on a standalone PC enter 127 0 0 1 Incoming Mail POP3 Enter the same IP address as you put for Outgoing Mail POP3 Account Enter the user ID which you defined in VPOP3 for the person who is going to be using this copy of Internet Mail Password Enter the password which you define in VPOP3 for the person using Internet Mail Page 122 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Advanced Settings Mail Server Advanced Settings E Beneye Manm semenat wi Gayle p wente Mami Seven Wie DETER ToT Welle ters We recommend that you leave the Advanced settings as their defaults Outgoing Mail SMTP Server Port 25 Incoming Mail POP3 Server Port 110 Do not download messages over Don t check use VPOP3 s size limiting facilities Leave a copy of messages on server Don t check Leave Reply To blank It will use your Email Address defined on the Server tab
88. Check Generate HTML Format messages if the Daily Summaries aren t being displayed in neat columns The Daily Summaries must be viewed in a fixed width font otherwise the columns don t align If VPOP3 generates HTML format messages it puts codes into the message telling your email reader to use a fixed width font instead of a proportional font e Turn on Keep Summary Logs to tell VPOP3 to keep the raw daily log files ina directory called SUMMARIES Example Daily Summary Message Local Messages User Id Send Receive Info Msgs paul 2 112 1 5 231 2 16 374 8 fiona 5 231 2 2 112 1 0 7 343 3 7 343 3 16 374 8 Internet Messages User Id Send Receive paul 23 132 15 115 097 18 fiona 1 337 1 16 947 9 24 469 16 132 044 27 In Queues with messages older than 1 day Name Num Messages Oldest Message monitor 25 14 May 1998 15 35 09 sonia 1 20 May 1998 18 31 03 POP3 Client 132 044 27 SMTP Client 24 469 16 The first section shows the size amp number of local messages sent amp received There are three columns 1 Send This shows the size amp number of local messages sent by each user 2 Receive This shows the size amp number of local messages received by each user 3 Info Msgs This shows the size amp number of information messages received by each user These are messages sent by VPOP3 to the user Page 168 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office In each column the
89. Complex Schedule from the SCHEDULE DAT file immediately SCHEDULE DAT File Format The SCHEDULE DAT file in the main VPOP3 directory contains the definition of a Complex Schedule It is a human readable text file which can be edited using a plain text editor such as Notepad or the MSDOS Edit program A sample SCHEDULE DAT file can be created by setting up a Simple Schedule and then pressing the Write Schedule DAT button Basic Complex Schedule Format An extract from a simple SCHEDULE DAT is shown below Day 0 Sunday In 09 00 Out 10 00 Out 11 00 In 12 00 Out 14 00 In 16 00 Day 1 Monday In 8 00 In 18 00 Out 23 00 Day 2 Tuesday In 8 00 In 18 00 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page I 17 VPOP3 Your email post office Out 23 00 Each day s schedule begins with the line Day x dddd where x is the number of day 0 Sunday 1 Monday etc and dddd is the name of the day purely for readability VPOP3 ignores this field Beneath each day s entry there are a list of lines beginning with In or Out Each of these lines specifies a connection type amp time The time can be specified to the nearest minute The connection type In means that VPOP3 will always attempt to connect at this time to check if your ISP has any waiting mail for you it will also send outgoing mail during this connection The connection type Out means that VPOP3 will only connect to your ISP at this time if there is email waiting
90. DAP from your email client is to tell your email client about the VPOP3 LDAP server To do this you need to check the documentation for your email client you will normally search for LDAP or Directory Services VPOP3 s LDAP server knows about all the users listed in the Users page By default it will know their Common Name userid Organizational Unit Name group and Mail email address details you can add more details for each user by going to the Edit User window for that user and pressing the Edit LDAP Data button This will let you specify some of the more common entries for each user if you wish VPOP3 s LDAP server also allows you to specify entries in a global email address book which can be used to hold company wide contacts Notes 1 When you are using your email client to search VPOP3 s LDAP server for users if you use the single character asterisk in any text or substring search VPOP3 will match all users so you can use this to get a full user list 2 VPOP3 does not currently support the Sounds Like search method in LDAP Instead it will use the Equals search method if you ask for a Sounds Like comparison LDAP ATR file There is a text file called LDAP ATR in the VPOP3 directory This contains a list of the LDAP attributes which VPOP3 s Edit LDAP Data window will let you enter This text file is a simple list of attributes in the form LDAP_attribute
91. E lt username gt PASSWORD lt password gt You can also specify a subject line of Disable InMail lt in mail method name gt to disable a specific In Mail method If you aren t an administrator you can only disable methods for which you are the Send Only To recipient Page 76 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Distributed Sites using VPOP3 This section will be useful for people who want to have people retrieving email from more or one different site but where all users have email addresses of lt someone gt yourcompany com There are four recommended methods of having distributed sites which all have people with email addresses of lt someone gt yourcompany co uk Each method has advantages and disadvantages e Distributed Sites using Hierarchical Servers 177 This method is the most complex to set up and requires the head office to be running Windows NT RAS server to allow dial in access A possible disadvantage of this method is that each time messages are collected or sent by a subsidiary office a phone call must be made from that office to the head office The other methods only require a phone call to a local ISP This may be a large issue if the distributed sites are in different countries This method has an advantage in that all internal email between sites is carried on direct connections rather than over the Internet so if security is a big issue this may be the solution to go
92. ERR Control File The External Autoresponder program can optionally write control lines to the STDERR file handle to indicate who the message should be sent to and whether the original message should be sent to the original recipient as well as being processed by the autoresponder The commands it can write to this file are To Xxx This will send the automated response message to the email address xxxxx Zero or more of these commands can be generated If zero To commands are generated the automated response message will be sent to the Reply To address of the original message If more than zero To commands are generated the originator will not receive the automated response message unless he she is specified explicitly From XXX This will indicate in the SMTP envelope that the message was sent by xxxxx Note that this is not the entry which will appear in the message headers That must be generated separately see below If more than one of these commands is sent the last one applies To None If this command is sent the automated response will be sent to NO recipients at all Once this command has been sent it cannot be revoked Keep 0 1 If a Keep 0 is sent the original recipient will not receive a copy of the original message If a Keep 1 is sent the original recipient will receive a copy of the original message If more than one of these commands is sent the last one applies Ho
93. Lists Local Mail Admin Misc Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Log Level Errors Only Max Size f OU K Keep Temporary Files Connection Logs Log POPS Server Connections Max Size fico lk T Log POPS Client Connections Log SMTP Server Connections T Log SMTP Client Connections Close Tuning Help e Log Level indicates how much detailed information is put in the main log file VPOP LOG Errors Only is the least detailed and Full Logging is the most detailed e Keep Temporary Files tells VPOP3 to keep all temporary mail files that would otherwise be deleted You should only turn this on if you are having serious problems or the author dealer tells you to If you leave this turned on for too long you may find that your hard disk fills up See Files VPOP3 Uses for a list of the possible files that may be left around e Log POP3 Server Connections tells VPOP3 to keep a log of all the data which gets sent between the POP3 server in VPOP3 and your email clients The data is stored in POP3SVR LOG e Log POP3 Client Connections tells VPOP3 to keep a log of all the data which gets sent between the POP3 client in VPOP3 and your ISP s mail server The data is stored in POP3CLT LOG e Log SMTP Server Connections tells VPOP3 to keep a log of all the data which gets sent between the SMTP server in VPOP3 and your email clients The data is stored in SMTPSVR LOG e Log SMTP Client Conn
94. MTP Server Options El Category bit Getting Started Retur address paul pscs co uk Domain to add to unqualified addresses pscs co uk SMTP server li 92 165 571 MW Immediate send W Sendon check M wod wra M May use guoted printable M Keep copes of outgoing mail Jas W Tabs in body of message Sending Mai I Use Signature Cancel Domain to add to unqualified addresses This should be your normal email domain name Immediate Send You probably want to turn this on Page 130 The other options can be set or cleared as you desire User Manual This should already have been entered as above This should already have been entered as above v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Advanced Networks Options El Category Use asynchronous Winsock calls for a M Database functions M All others Extra Warnings Network open timeout E0 seconds 10101010 Network timeout after E0 seconds RAS Dialup Network buffer size of 4096 bytes el ei a I Cache nework info Advanced Network T Unload Winsock OLL after closing socket Automatically dial amp hangup this connection Entry ha Username Save password z rea LEP Kerberos Leave these settings at their defaults Use Asynchronous Winsock Calls Both options can be turned either on or off Leave at the default setting unless you have problems Network open
95. Now choose Mail amp Groups gt Directory Preferences Category Penman e ce Choose directones for searching addresses Navigator When searching directores search for tems Mail amp Groups using these directories in the following order Identity io Messages Personal Address Book oe Mail Server Foul Directory an G InfoSpace Directory o joya ae WhoW here Directory ee rectory Bigfoot Directory Composer Switchboard Directory E Offline H Advanced Show full names as First Name Last Name John Sith Last Name First Name Smith Johr Cancel Help Press the New button Add Directory Server Description Description vPOPS LDAP Server li 952 168 0 1 Cancel Search Root Port Humber ee e Help Masimum Humber of Hits li OW In Description type VPOP3 or Local or whatever name you want to use In LDAP Server type the IP address of the VPOP3 server Leave the other entries as they are Press OK 2 ye v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 157 VPOP3 Your email post office Using the LDAP service in Netscape Messenger 4 When you have set up Netscape Messenger you go to the Communicator menu in Messenger and choose the Address Book option File Edit View Communicator Help Yu ZN amp Hew land Hew List Properties New Msg Director alll Delete Type in the name you are looking For pe ooo o O 1 Type in the nam
96. OG file Enhance Fax mailbox facility for FAXmaker so that it allows characters for specifying recipient name company Add default postmaster mapping to recipient of messages for unrecognised users What s new in VPOP3 V1 2 8 Page 2 Vastly improve HTTP Admin server Add incoming IP address checking for all VPOP3 TCP IP services using xxxxAllowed DAT files Add RAS DUN error reporting Add ESMTP support to both SMTP client amp server only extended command is DSN Delivery Service Notification Allow messages to Mailer_Daemon to be sent from non local addresses as well as local addresses User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office e Add Outmail processor extension capability e Add environment variables to autoresponders external routers outmail processor post connect pre disconnect extensions e Performance enhancements to LDAP server e Add support for reading VCF files into the LDAP external address book e Add MIME support to HTTP mail reader allows multipart MIME messages and allows downloading of MIME attachments from a web browser e Add support for sending messages to the HTTP mail reader e Add support for changing basic user settings by a user using a web browser e Add support for Groups of similarly configured users to have their settings all changed at once e Add support to enable disable mailbox access to Groups of users easily e Add
97. OP3 The available options are Send Error Message to Main Administrator This causes VPOP3 to attach the incoming message to an error message which is sent to the Main Administrator Send Incoming Mail to Main Administrator This causes VPOP3 to send the message as it is to the Main Administrator v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 209 VPOP3 Your email post office Send Error Msg to This causes VPOP3 to attach the incoming message to an error message which is sent to a specified user Send Incoming Msg to This causes VPOP3 to send the message as it is to the a specified user Treat as REMOTE This causes VPOP3 to treat any unrecognised user as if it is a Remote User This can be useful when you have multiple sites NOTE you should NEVER have this option set at ALL sites otherwise badly addressed email will simply disappear without a bounce message or any error message anywhere This option is slightly different from the Send local mail for unrecognised users to ISP option on the Local Mail page because this option will ignore incoming mail for unrecognised users whereas that option won t Bounce Message to Sender This option can be used with any of the other options In this case an incoming Internet message to an unrecognised user will generate a bounce message which sent back to the originator stating that the addressee was not recognised You can customise the bounce message if you wish Automatic Login
98. P S y LS O mannan aaueecw ein lI WY Mat SNEEN IN VIPS VAAN O oaeee eseese esee EEEE EEEE nnn wae II Whats new in VP ORS VEZ cscs esis NEEE AAAS EEA ASAA ALAE ANAAL 12 Whats new in VPOP V l2 ecccccscscsssssccccicsosiscsccccsccosusesesccscevscsevesecsensesesesceiesdsevencececeseesescecese queued 12 VV DAE SNOWY POS VIZ Feiss abbyy ee hh acsesecceccacecaeseestee 13 Vat S NEW INN PO P3 VF 226 rariss iiri i RRA aca annunnd eae eee 14 WV hat snew in VPOP3 V I2 SAren RR I5 VDA EWAN YRO R N E AoE EE O I5 Installation 16 Setting Up your TOPP LAN cnini E E 18 Choosing the VPOP S SEVE Firre ee e E EE E EEES 19 Server C ONNEUrAON cccszacrcacsesdestccvatectsceetostestedest lt cveductusvedlostestsdectsceetedtsstsdestestsdectecsedectearelests 20 VPOP3 Menu 21 VPOP S SLID TEID OT hoo eee eesesmseneneronanancaeaecencacacsesesecacdensasasasn EEE 24 VEREOR MIE N a ENO AEE 22 D LO SO p AA PE E T N E T 22 FRESISCPAtION INTOMMATION se aa aaa SSN 22 VPOP3 Configuration Steps 24 Connections In Mail and Out Mail 25 Connection Property Faga csesieirreeitardir oi e E 26 Defining the RAS COMMECCION wessssssssscscocssssecocesesesssesesnsenesasesenageszszszssssssssezsssseterenetantatanmmmnrae nee 26 Alternative dial up Connections and AutoConnect sesseseesessesresreeresseeseeseessessessesrroreosesseesreereeseoreesssess 27 Other Setting Sea a ENE NEETA A ALAA Laaa cca aca dada cecesea ceeded 27 GONTISUPE AUILO COMME CE sisisi a a E R 28 Incoming mail settings 29 Mai
99. P ile FOMA cox cszszsssconsctescssccescestscetaeasnattecstnenesatteestosrteerte eter e 17 Basic Complex Schedule Forma sececececcteceeecesesesevesesesaseeesovesevesesesescacsesesesesececueeducatatatevanatatetetetedureppsseseeseesene 117 Scheduling Multiple Server connections e ssessessessessessesseessesresresreoresseeseoseoseoseeseessessessessesseoreoseesessessessesseee 118 Specifying Outgoing Connection Thresholds sssssscssscssesesectssssesesececussssesesececnesesesesecscaesssesesesesecsenees 118 R loading a Complex SChedUlE re a tre prer ere Ee ER EET EET ETE TET Trt er ES TptDT DT Dror DnETUnDeEt Ete tten nner sr srerer sree 119 Making VPOP3 Connect 120 Dialling from the Menu cssscsssssssssscecsssscssessscsscssessesecesessssessscesessecesesceesessceseseseeesacseses 120 Dialling from a Web Browser cccsssssssessscsssssscsssscsscesscesscesessscesessecesesceseaseceseseseeeescseses 120 Configuring your Email Client Software 121 Microso Internet Malkicsissisiaesicssa ss n a a 21 LUT TUCE TNS RON UTE rr ee a nn ee a eer 27 LDAP WI EUJr a G oacnasrsensisruneneraaenenore aaa na 32 Setting up the LDAP service in Eudora Pro 4 0 0 esssssscececscecscesesecececececcecscscsesescsescsescsescsesescsceescseseaeaces 132 Using the LDAP service in Eudora Pro 4 0 ssssssssssssescsescsesssesesesssesesesscesecsescecscscscscscscecscececscseseeeeneneseees 135 Fesa ue Ma a On aE gr CTE OPE en ce eee rrr 136 Configuring Outlook Windo
100. POP3 server normally you will need to be running NT Workstation or Server in order to get a Dial In Server which supports TCP IP Because of this limitation VPOP3 now has a feature called VPOP3 File Transfer for sending and receiving email messages This method works by transferring files so it works with any network protocol which supports file sharing eg NetBEUI Microsoft Networking or IPX SPX Novell Networks With this method both the server and the remote PC need to be running VPOP3 Server Configuration The server needs to share the VPOP3 directory and all subdirectories so that the PC which is connecting over the dial up connection can e Create Delete Read amp Write files in the VPOP3 directory e Create Write amp Delete files in the VPOP3 OutQueue directory e Create Read amp Delete files in the VPOP3 lt user gt directory or directories where lt user gt is the user for which the remote VPOP3 is going to retrieve messages e Create VPOP3 users for each user and remote user as normal Page 218 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 Remote 1 v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office PC Configuration Create a VPOP3 user for the user of this remote PC Give this user the same name and password as the corresponding user on the server On the In Mail and Out Mail page choose VPOP3 File Xfer as the method Then in the Source Path or Target Path fields enter the UNC name of the VPOP
101. Property Page Missing VPOP3 Icon The VPOP3 icon should always be visible in the Windows taskbar If it is not visible VPOP3 may still be running To show the VPOP3 icon use the command line parameters ShowIcon and Hideicon For instance running VPOP3 Showicon will cause VPOP3 to re show its icon in the Windows taskbar v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 205 VPOP3 Your email post office Moving VPOP3 to a different PC To move VPOP3 to a different PC you should go through the following steps 1 Copy the VPOP3 directory and subdirectories from the old PC to the new PC 2 Run RegEdit on the old PC and export the registry branch HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE PaulSmith VPOP3 3 Run RegEdit on the new PC and import this registry branch 4 Install VPOP3 on the new PC Name Expansion Order When VPOP3 detects a valid email address it expands it to make sure that all appropriate users get a copy of the message 1 VPOP3 checks to see if the address is a valid Mapping 2 It checks to see if it is a valid User List 3 It checks for a valid User Mailbox If the name matches a valid User Mailbox VPOP3 checks for any Assistants and then a User Forwarding setting Note VPOP3 does NOT go backwards through this list so if VPOP3 finds an assistant it will NOT search through the mappings or user lists to find a matching name so assistants and User Forwarding entries must either be User Mailboxes or external email addresses t
102. Property Page 42 Domain to add to Unqualified Addresses swcscccsssssisesssiescscscscscscoceccssscesscscscsoscecececccccscscscsceadiveoeneeearanensssessessstoas 42 Route Local Mail Locally cy ccccassnssennsnsieannemanneianndecannaanminaneneammnet 42 TENN aroyen vie Vacall ny aeeseemeceet ee eer rr tr ee NN A 43 Local Servers Property Page 44 PANY Connections OI cass a ence T E E AS 45 Out Mail Property Page 46 There are three methods of sending outgoing email esssseseseseseseseseseeesesscesesecesecseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseees 46 Outgoing Mail using an SMTP Relay eesesessssseceeesceceseesscssscceeeeescecessessceceneesacsceees 47 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 3 VPOP3 Your email post office Outgoing Mail using Direct SMTP uu essscesesscescesscescscesessscsseecscsesaseceessssesesscseeeeeees 47 Users 49 Jeers Property Rapo eein e E Saat as na essa setae 49 Add ea her S Pa ea err ee Fe ry ee oy pe Oe A RE SO te 5 Basic Configuration to Add a New USE esssssscscscscssscssssesesessssscsesesssescsssssesesesesesesesesesesesesseseseseseneneses 5 Edit LOAP Ditarin cade cece EEEE EECC T E 52 AUCORCSDONGER SECEINO S irere eee ee ee eee 53 LASEL ETEA M H 03 EPEA OEEO IEEE 53 REMOVE FOSAS ET AIS ET E E gems 54 Mailbox Mappings 54 WY Pa ca cae Wa ba Feo 0 ay d ornen nne A AE 54 laport Mappings enenen annann RaR Ea roar ER EPAPER EEE LAE O CCELA LAULULE ESCASSA EEEE EEEE ELRES 56 Epor OMAD DNA a a aE ee 56 ASS SCANS a8
103. Supporting multiple sites using LAN Forwarding is suitable for situations where all sites are connected using a WAN of some sort eg a kilostream link routed ISDN or some other method Using this method all mail between sites is sent to the destination server immediately so note the cost implications if the link uses something like ISDN which is not a fixed cost so mail arrives a lot quicker than using any of the other distributed sites mechanisms Head Office Subnet 192 168 0 0 WAN 182 168 2 1 subnet 192 168 1 0 Office 2 Lets say that the company has a registered domain of company com and the users at each office are listed below Head Office Sarah John Philip Office 2 Martin Karen Office 3 Louise Jane At Head Office 1 Create users called Sarah John Philip 2 Create an SMTPFWD DAT file with the entries v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 8 VPOP3 Your email post office Martin 192 168 1 1 Karen 192 168 1 1 Louise 192 168 2 1 Jane 192 168 2 1 3 Make a Connection to connect to the ISP 4 Make an In Mail entry to collect incoming mail from the ISP 5 Make an Out Mail entry to send outgoing mail to the ISP At Office 2 1 Create users called Martin Karen 2 Create an SMTPFWD DAT file with the entries Sarah 192 John 192 Philip 192 Louise 192 Jane 192 168 0 1 168 0 1 168 0 1 168 2 1 168 2 1 3 Make a Connection saying Connect Using LAN 4
104. TCP IP configuration settings You can try the Optimum settings option or set the MTU to 576 3 On the Remote Administration Listserver Commands If Remote Administration see Mailing List Properties is enabled for a list the moderator s can send messages to ListServer to add remove list members To start remote administration the message to ListServer should contain the following lines before the remote administration commands Moderate lt listname gt Password lt list password gt The remote administration commands should be terminated with the line EndModerate Valid remote administration commands are Add Remove Each of these commands should be followed by a list of members to add or remove and the list is terminated by EndAdd or EndRemove as appropriate Any line beginning with a is ignored If you also add the command Quiet then VPOP3 will not send an acknowledgement message back to the moderator Example The following is a valid remote administration message Moderate Mylist Password passwd Add this is a comment simon brown com karen bobble org EndAdd Remove a naughty user EndRemove Page 228 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office EndModerate Tuning Parameters tab see page 214 try telling VPOP3 to use Sequential POP3 gt SMTP Connection Windows NT reports an Out Of Buffers error after a while This is a bug in Windows NT 4 x associated with the new dia
105. The user can modify their own Plan using by sending a message to Mailer_Daemon This message should have a subject of Set Plan If this subject is specified the text of the mail message is used as the new plan The user can also send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject of Query Plan In this case Mailer_Daemon will respond with the current contents of the user s plan file Page 198 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Headers Property Page The Headers Property Page tells VPOP3 how to will respond to certain special header fields POP3 Settings ki E3 Connection In Mail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Users Mappings Lists Local Mail Admin Misc ue Headers Logging Diagnostics Into Priority Messages Priority Urgent Connect Immediately My Tt s Friority Highest M for Priority Messages Using Receipts Generate Delivery Retumn Receipt To si Receipts or E W Only Generate Delivery Receipts on Local messages Generate Transmission Retur Receipt To Close Receipts or Help Defaults Priority Messages A Priority message is one which is indicated as urgent by a header fields You signify which header fields and associated values mean that the message is urgent in the entry area Enter a single line per field value pair with the field name being followed by a colon and then the value to look for Note that the
106. These will tell VPOP3 how to connect to the Internet using each of those dial up accounts e For each of these Connection entries you will create a corresponding Out Mail entry which tells VPOP3 how to send outgoing mail when it is connected to one or the other of these dial up account e You will also typically tell VPOP3 about these two accounts by creating two In Mail entries one for each ISP These will tell VPOP3 how to collect your email from both of those Internet email accounts The simplest thing to do is to simply tell VPOP3 to link the ISP1 In Mail configuration to the ISP1 Connection and the ISP2 In Mail to the ISP2 Connection However if you do that to collect email from both ISP1 and ISP2 VPOP3 will have to make two dial up connections to the Internet which will be slow and costly Instead you can tell VPOP3 to link the ISP1 In Mail connection to BOTH Connections and similarly with the ISP2 In Mail configuration Most Internet providers allow you to have access to your POP3 mailboxes from anywhere on the Internet so VPOP3 can easily access the ISP1 POP3 mailbox when it is connected to the Internet using ISP2 When you do this you can tell VPOP3 to either connect using ISP1 or to connect using ISP2 in either case it will collect mail from both your ISP mailboxes v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 25 VPOP3 Your email post office Connections Connection Property Page VPOP3 needs to know how to connect to yo
107. This would look like Users Mappings fee WelGame Caneel james jim sales fred Allowing someone to read someone s messages if they are on holiday For this we would recommend the use of an assistant However if you want to do it using mappings you should do this If user jim has gone on holiday and you want fred to read his messages as well as leaving them in jims mailbox for when he returns you should add two mappings jim gt jim jim gt fred This would look like Users Mappings Lists Mail Server Connection irri fred im jim Forwarding messages for someone who has left to someone else within the company For this you would use a single mapping Assume jim has left the company and you want fred to read all the messages that arrive for him You would add a single mapping jim gt fred You could also remove the mailbox for jim as no messages will be sent to his mailbox any more This would look like Users Mappings Lists Mail Server Connection Him fred Instead of doing this you may wish to forward all the messages for jim onto his new email addresses To do this you should use either user forwarding or a Distribution List containing a single remote user his new email address see Email Forwarding on page 166 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 203 VPOP3 Your email post office Miscellaneous Property Page The Misc property page lets you set up certain miscellaneous fea
108. VPOP3 Your email post office User Manual VPOP3 Your email post office Copyright Statement This manual is proprietary information of Paul Smith Computer Services and is not to be copied reproduced lent or disposed of nor used for any purpose other than for which it is specifically provided without the written permission of Paul Smith Computer Services The software described in this document is supplied under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license and in particular any warranty of fitness of Paul Smith Computer Services software products for any particular purpose is expressly excluded and in no event will Paul Smith Computer Services be liable for any consequential loss Because of the nature of this material hardware and software products may be mentioned by name In most if not all cases these product names are claimed as trademarks by the companies that manufacture the products It is not our intention to claim these names or trademarks as our own All rights reserved v1 3 0 doc release 0 3 1999 Paul Smith Computer Services Page 2 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Contents COPY MIB E SCALE INIOR IE erara E E E aeaeeeeee esters 2 Contents 3 Introduction to VPOP3 9 VPOPS simany Other features c 40 Acntenndakedacianndesdatuniaswadieawents 10 VROP 3 REGU CR NCI IES oanien a a a a a YN DaT SINE Wecana a T A VV AES NEWN VPO
109. VR LOG POP3SVR LOG POP3CLT LOG Connection log files OLD Previous copies of the LOG files above LCK Mailbox Lock Files ML DAT Temporary file whilst processing Mailing list messages SRVRUIDL DAT SVRUIDLx DAT Logs of which messages have been retrieved from a POP3 server if LeaveMessagesOnServer is enabled In the OutQueue subdirectory Q DAT Queued message files waiting to be sent A DAT Archived message files that VPOP3 found an problem with The author may want to know about these D DAT Files which would have been deleted but you had the Keep Temporary Files box checked on the Diagnostics page In the HouseKeeper subdirectory The HouseKeeper directory contains data for VPOP3 s own use such as for AutoResponders LAN forwarding Mailing Lists etc MD DAT Messages waiting to be processed by Mailer_Daemon Page 196 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office LS DAT Messages waiting to be processed by ListServer AR DAT Control files waiting to be processed by an External AutoResponder FQ DAT Messages waiting to be processed by LAN Forwarding HQ DAT Messages which have failed with LAN Forwarding and need to be retried There is a subdirectory under the HouseKeeper directory called MailList which contains information about Mailing Lists The MailList subdirectory Each Mailing List has a subdirectory in the MailList subdirectory named after the Mailing List This
110. a Find People 4 entries found VPOP3 LOAP hd faniipscs co uk honatpscs co uk fredianscs co uk mikefmintosource corn In Name or E mail type the text you want to search for and press Find Now v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 5 VPOP3 Your email post office Netscape Messenger 4 This description is for Netscape Messenger 4 06 All options not mentioned below can be set as you desire Choose Edit Preferences from the menu Select Mail amp Groups from the list on the left Preferences Fl Appearance 1 Navigator SB Mail amp Groups eile ltal Messages ais M Mail Server Regular Groups Server Directory i Composer H Offline H Advanced Page 152 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Choose Identity from the list on the left Preferences Category F Appearance r name email address and signature file E Navigator aj Mail amp Groups entity The information ts needed before you can send mail IF you do nat Lehes ages know the information requested please contact your system oOo Wail Server administrator or Internet Service Provider z Groups Server Your name H Composer Email address Offline ma a 4 anced paulpecs co uk Reply to address only needed if different from email address Organization Paul Smith Computer Services Signature File Always attach Address Book Card to messages Edit Card Your na
111. a message about some products The incoming message will be discarded Thank you for your request for further information about our products Our product range consists of the following two items 1 VPOP3 This is a powerful Internet email server for small amp medium sized businesses to allow them to have Internet email on their networks at a very affordable price 2 VSOCKS Light This is a basic but free Internet proxy server allowing small businesses to have access the Internet over their network through a single modem connection A basic vacation autoresponder This responds to a message to michael yourdomain com with a message saying that someone is away for a few days Note 1 the lt Keep gt option must be set so that mail to Michael isn t discarded once the response is sent Note 2 the lt OnlyOnce gt option must be set Once of the big problems with vacation autoresponders is that if the user is subscribed to any mailing lists response messages bombard the mailing list The automatic responses may be sent back to the users which will generate more responses and so on Setting the lt OnlyOnce gt option means that a response will only be sent to the mailing list once lt Keep gt lt OnlyOnce gt Michael is currently on vacation until 23rd June 1998 He will respond to your message as soon as possible when he returns If your message is urgent contact his colleague at helena yourdomain com If you
112. age will remain on the server for the Query Download Delay setting unless the ISP server deletes it first before being deleted Redirect This will cause the message to be download but sent to a different recipient from normal This facility can be used to implement basic message filtering v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 16l VPOP3 Your email post office Defining Download Rules To define download rules create or edit a text file called DLRULES DAT in the VPOP3 directory DLRULES DAT File Format Here s a description of the file format The file contains zero or more Rules Comment lines start with a Blank lines are ignored Rules are processed in the order they appear in the DLRULES DAT file and processing stops as soon as a rule matches Download Rules Rule Format Each Rule has a format of One Rule Definition line containing the Rule Action and Name indicating what happens if the rule is triggered followed by Zero or more Rule Condition lines indicating what conditions need to be matched to trigger the rule Rule Definition The Rule definition line optionally starts with a sign If the is present the rule is an OR rule that means that if at least one of the conditions matches the rule triggers If the is not present the rule is an AND rule all the conditions must match for the rule to trigger After the optional sign there is another charact
113. ail post office Mailing List Digests VPOP3 has a simple mailing list digest facility This facility allows users to only request a periodic digest of mailing list messages instead of lots of individual messages When you tell VPOP3 that a mailing list is going to have a digest it will create a new list called listnhame_Digest which users can subscribe to independently of the original list You also tell VPOP3 to Post Digests every x days VPOP3 will keep all messages for digest lists and every x days at midnight or the next available time it will package all those messages into a single message and send it to the members of the listname_Digest group When VPOP3 packages the messages it sorts them by message subject and then by time so all messages about a single topic should be erouped together in chronological order Mailing List Moderated Posts A moderated mailing list is one where all message posts are checked by a moderator before being distributed to the list members Whenever a message is sent to a moderated list by anyone other than a moderator the message is first sent to the list moderator s in a message as below From mylList pscs co uk TO lt paul gt Subject Message post to moderated list Mod mylist Date Thu 4 Jun 1998 00 23 32 0100 Mailing List mylist Message Originator fred pscs co uk Original Subject My Message Received from 127 0 0 1 by wolf compulink co uk 127 0 0 1 running VPOP3 with
114. ailing List Server support e There is no LAN Forwarding e There is no VPOP3 File Transfer Server there is a VPOP3 File Transfer client e There is no External Router support e There is no Outmail Processor support e It only supports a single Connection instead of 10 e Itonly supports up to 5 In Mail methods instead of 1000 Page 200 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Import User Database You can export the VPOP3 User Database by going to the Users Property Page pressing Advanced and then pressing Export User List to File Import Userlist Look ir Ej vpop3 File name Jusers cev Files of type esv Files Cancel Help Passwords From File i Encrypted Random C UserName C Password M Re import Exported File i Import ll Details Update Existing Users Remove Users not present This is a normal File Open window but with a few extra options If you choose the Re import Exported File option VPOP3 will re import a file which was exported previously VPOP3 will automatically detect the format of the exported file by looking at the CSV Titles If you choose the Import All Details option VPOP3 will import the Verbose file instead of the basic file look at the different possible CSV file formats If you choose the Update Existing Users option if VPOP3 finds an already existing user in the file being imported it will set the propert
115. ails to various different support staff so that each support person has tasks to do e You may want to search message text for Dear Bill or Bill on the first line of the message text and send the message to the appropriate user If you want to scan message headers it may be better to use the redirect download rules e You may want to search messages addressed to support yourcompany com for the name of specific products so that you can route the message to the correct support person e You could virus check all incoming messages and delete or redirect any messages containing infected attachments Telling VPOP3 about the External Router The external routing program should be a command line program or batch file You define the program to run in the External Router entry in the VPOP3 Extensions window e Ifthe router is an executable program EXE then just enter the full path to the program e g c myprogs vpop3_router exe e Ifthe router is a batch file BAT then enter COMMAND COM Windows 95 or CMD EXE Windows NT with the parameters c followed by the batch file name e g c windows command com c c vpop3 myrouter bat e If the router is a PERL script PL then enter PERL EXE with the script name as the parameter e g c perl bin perl exe c program files vpop3routing p Note if there are any spaces in the path to the program or script that path must be surrounded by double quotes as in the PERL example a
116. al Signature 62 Groups 57 Hangup Now 20 120 Headers for Mailing Lists 95 Headers Property Page 200 Hold Obsolete UIDLs 219 Home User version 201 HouseKeeper Directory 81 83 196 How Many Users are Used 72 How the AutoResponse Mechanism Works 81 HTTP Administration 172 214 I m using VPOP3 on the same machine as WinGate or WinProxy FireDoor etc and I get errors like POP3 Server not started Coul 228 Icon Missing 207 If Outgoing Mail arrives whilst online 206 225 send immediately 207 225 Ignore Rule 161 Import Forwarding Lists 92 Import Mappings 50 Import Member List 95 Import User List 72 202 Importing User Database 202 In Mappings 50 In Mail 24 28 101 177 186 SMTP 101 102 Incoming Mail 29 Incoming Mail using SMTP 32 101 Step By Step Configuration 31 Incoming Mailing List Messages 36 Info Property Page 99 Initial Configuration 23 Inline Expansion Tags 76 Installation 16 Internet Mail Protocols 171 Internet Reply Address 63 Internet Reply Address Usage Example 63 Introduction 9 Inward SMTP 31 Step by Step Configuration 31 IP Addresses 16 IPX SPX 219 ISP Mail Servers 28 ISP Settings 110 111 112 CIX Internet 110 ClaraNet 111 Demon Internet 110 Freeserve 111 GlobalNet 112 User Manual Page 233 VPOP3 Your email post office LAN Forwarding 39 182 223 LDAP Server 41 188 190 LDAP with Calypso 158 LDAP with Netscape Messenger 4 158 LDAP ATR 18
117. amels co uk e Local Mail Domain of cybercamels co uk e This should collect mail from the cybercamels co uk account e What to do with Incoming mail for Unknown Recipients should be set to something like Send Error Msg to xxxxx Office 2 Configuration e A user called philip e A user called karen e Accepted Domains of cybercamels co uk e Local Mail Domain of cybercamels co uk e This should collect mail from the cybercamels co uk account e What to do with Incoming mail for Unknown Recipients should be set to Treat as REMOTE v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 179 VPOP3 Your email post office Distributed Sites Using Subsidiary Mail Accounts 1 To use this method you will need an email account with an ISP for each office This email account doesn t need to have domain name registration it can be any standard POP3 email account You designate one office to be the main office and use your main email account for that office You then designate your other accounts to the other offices 1 At the main office a Set up any local users b For any users at the other offices set up a Distribution List with a name of the user and a single Remote Member of the email account of their office s POP3 email account see Email Forwarding 2 At the secondary office s a Set up any local users b As 3 b above create Distribution Lists for each user at the other offices Note Because this method relies on setting up lot
118. ameters will be passed to the already running copy to be processed without starting a second copy of the program The possible parameters are Shutdown This will shutdown the copy of VPOP3 which is running Options This will display the Property Pages Status This will display the Status window AllPrimary This is the same as clicking Connect Now All Primary it will cause VPOP3 to connect to the Primary RAS connection all LAN connection and any connections defined as Primary All This will cause VPOP3 to connect to all defined connections Primary This will cause VPOP3 to connect to the first connection this is the same as using Conn1 Conn1 Conn10 This will cause VPOP3 to connect to the specified connection Quiet This will cause the secondary copy of VPOP3 not to report that it has sent the command line to the previously running copy of VPOP3 Showicon This will cause VPOP3 to show the icon in the taskbar tray Hideicon This will cause VPOP3 to hide the icon in the taskbar tray Reg This will cause VPOP3 to read its registry settings from a different registry branch This option can only be specified when starting VPOP3 it cannot be used to tell VPOP3 to change settings whilst it is running The default is REG VPOP3 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 173 VPOP3 Your email post office Creating an External Router Before the external router is run VPOP3 stores the incoming message in a file cal
119. and b to keep member s email addresses private This effectively means that the only way VPOP3 has of getting the addressing information is lost The workaround in VPOP3 is to use Mappings When you receive an email address from a mailing list it will normally be addressed To lt listnhame gt You simply tell VPOP3 to create a Mapping from lt listname gt to the mailboxes of the people who want to receive the messages Below is a sample message header from a mailing list Received From I Sales gs2 revnet com Message Id To I Sales gs2 revnet com Subject I Sales Digest 591 John Audette Date Mon 05 Jan 1998 14 54 17 0600 Errors To I Sales gs2 revnet com Originator I Sales gs2 revnet com If users philip and lucy wanted to receive this message you would create two mappings Sales gs2 revnet com gt philip I Sales gs2 revnet com gt lucy If you will want to be able to send messages to the list a normal mapping not work correctly if the To address is the same as the Reply To address since email responses will be handled locally instead of going back to the list In this case prefix the mapping Email Address with In This will tell VPOP3 to only process the mapping on incoming messages not outgoing ones In I Sales gs2 revnet com gt philip Note This method can become tedious It is necessary because of limitations in the basic POP3 protocol Some ISPs get around this problem by exten
120. ange Internet Email Reply Address You set this option on the Add User page or the Group Definition window How this facility works If you set this option VPOP3 will scan the following header fields in any messages which are to be sent onto the Internet Page 66 e To e From e Reply To e Cc e Sender e Return Receipt To User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office When VPOP3 finds any of these fields VPOP3 will scan through the data for those fields and see if it finds any email address which matches a local user s email address i e username a local domain If it does VPOP3 will check to see if the Internet Reply Address has been set for that user and then change the address in the header to that new address Why would you use it This facility is useful if someone s Internet email address is different from their local email address For instance if you are telling VPOP3 to share a single email address amongst many people Internet Reply Address Usage Example As an example of how to use the Internet Reply Address facility let s look at an example where people are sharing a single email address We have a group of people jim clare and mike sharing an email address widgets superisp com If you tell VPOP3 to use the email routing method Attempt To Work With a Single Email Address these people will have Internet email addresses of jim lt widgets superisp com gt clare
121. any com lt anyone gt yourcompany isp c yourcompany isp com om and yourcompany isp com yourcompany isp com The ACCEPTED DOMAINS setting can contain several entries separated by semicolons in case your ISP lets your email be addressed in several ways e g if you have a normal ISP account and also have email forwarding to that account from a registered domain name The ACCEPTED DOMAINS setting can also contain complete email addresses as well as email domains This can be useful if you should only receive messages to certain addresses at an email domain instead of all addresses If you specify email addresses you can use a wildcard to specify a group of email addresses eg mysite mycompany com As a rule e if youcan receive messages addressed to lt anyone gt address address should be the entry in the ACCEPTED DOMAINS field e if youcan only receive messages to person address person address should be the entry in the ACCEPTED DOMAINS field What the Accepted Domains setting does The Accepted Domains setting is used for correct detection of incoming messages to people at your site e When an email message arrives at your site from the Internet it may be addressed to several people not all of which are at your site For instance you might receive a message which is sent To simon yourcompany co uk philip anothercompany co uk e VPOP3 must know which email domains can be accepted
122. as the default not on a per time basis To specify a threshold you suffix the Out with the threshold level in parentheses for instance Out 3 17 00 Out 1 19 00 This means that VPOP3 will connect at 17 00 if there are at least 3 outgoing mail messages waiting to be sent and at 19 00 if there is at least 1 outgoing message to be sent User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Reloading a Complex Schedule To cause VPOP3 to reload the SCHEDULE DAT file you should either shutdown and restart VPOP3 or go to the Schedule properties page and press the Reload File button v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 119 VPOP3 Your email post office Making VPOP3 Connect There are various ways of making VPOP3 connect to your ISP e VPOP3 will connect automatically according to its schedule e VPOP3 can be told to connect sooner for urgent messages e Ifyou run VPOP3 AllPrimary from a command line it will connect immediately e You can choose Connect Now from the VPOP3 menu or Connection page e If you create a file called CONNECT NOW in the VPOP3 directory VPOP3 will connect immediately Dialling from the Menu You can tell VPOP3 to allow you to collect send email using the VPOP3 menu by enabling Allow Connections from Menu on the Misc Property Page If you do this the right click menu on the VPOP3 post box will contain extra entries Connect Now and Hangup Now If you only have a sing
123. ast In Mail Configuration 224 Import User Database 201 Passwords OPtONS is Aa L 201 Mailer Daemon Control Messages cssscsssssccsscsscssscescssssessecssessscesscesessscesessscesescenees 208 Kappin E Xap eSa a ten ttbeles 202 Sending mail for a sales address to your salesperson s own mailboX ssssssesssessssssesssessesssesseessesseee 202 Allowing someone to read someone s messages if they are on Holiday esesesesseseseeececeeesseeeeeeees 203 Forwarding messages for someone who has left to someone else within the company 203 Miscellaneous Property Page 204 Missing VPOP ToOfaannanminanne cok iced 205 Moving VPOP3 to a different PC 206 Name Expansion Order sscsesxcszaasceceescscncsneseshescssacasestcechesoasestcocndestcenicetncseadeesoxeaeeieeceneones 206 OutMail Processors 207 Query Assistant using Mailer Daen eeoa isese esseer iE EE EE EEEE 208 Query Finger Plan using Mailer Daemon esesssscesecessscssesesececsssesesesecucsesssesesecucsssesesesecucsesesesesecnenees 208 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 7 VPOP3 Your email post office Query Forwarding Settings using Mailer Daemon ssssesececsssesesecececsssesesesececscsesesesececseseseseeeceenseesees 208 The Admin Property Page 209 Custom Bounce Messages merna 21 Remote Administration 212 WV ED Page Based ACM iS tk Aci OI annere EE E 212 Administration DY CN All sxtesedeckeacesotect esate ete arterela a aaia aibi 213 Set
124. at Strings eserse s 8l AutoResponder Time Format Strings csccsccscscscscscscssssssssssssssssesssesssssssssesesesesesssesesesesesssesssssesesenssenenensees 8 Response Dennition Tagsir r Er E aaa snnenecacncededededadadeceeeatecate 82 Example Simple AutoresponderS s ssesessssesesessssesesssresesesssresesesrosesesessesesessoresesessesessose 83 A basic information aUtOresPONdel eccna a 83 PC Dasic Vacation AviLOneSsDONnd el Srii e enna eee eens 83 A price list autoresponderniucekunnuu ie nnnnnnnee een anuuu umn nas 83 External AUtCORESDONCENIS 2e2icccdecscacecscecedecsssceth cues call cacs codsessi colt cocscnesludacicinmeuieelediel ected 84 Page 4 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Defining an External AUtCORCS DOM eI ocasiao How the AutoResponse Mechanism WorkS ccscssscscssssecesssesesesssssssescsescsesesescseseseesseees AutoResponder Environment Variables ccscscscscscececscesesssesssseecsessscscsesescscsssesesesssseeees Testing the AutoResponder ia iscscssssssssnssnannnnnnnanannnnnmammmmnnnees AutoResponder STDIN Input File snosoessossosossesssessessessesseosesseoseoseoseoseeseessessesseoseessesseesess How torsad STDIN eere ann nc cecuccceceveccsuceceeceveccsuceceecevecesucescecevecssuceseeceasestacen eeegineegs AutoResponder STDOUT Output File aicscscscacacececetteceieiasesencacacesacacacacadscedcavasacnsasnsasecasase How to Write to STDOUT ccsscssnussmannsmannnmeeeme
125. ation Format 60 Password format 60 Verbose Format 61 Custom Bounce Messages 213 Custom Fields 106 Daily Logs 167 Daily Summaries 168 Default User 211 Defined Users 72 Defining a Mailing List 88 Defining an External AutoResponder 80 Defining Groups 57 Delete Silently Rule 161 Deleting Messages 71 Deleting Queued Messages 71 Delivered To 106 Delivery Receipts 200 201 Demon Internet 106 110 Configuring VPOP3 for use with 110 POP3 Extensions 106 Dequeuing Email 101 Detecting dial up connection 27 Diagnostics Property Page 176 Dialing into VPOP3 219 Dial up Networking 25 219 Digests Mailing Lists 94 Disable InMail Methods by Email 177 Distributed Sites 55 178 180 181 182 219 Using Hierarchical Servers 178 Using LAN Forwarding 182 Using REMOTE Mappings 180 Using Subsidiary Email Accounts 181 Distributed Users 55 Distribution List 86 87 Distribution Lists 85 86 Domain Names 105 Download and Delete Rule 161 Download Rules 161 162 163 164 conditions 163 defining 162 Example Only download one person s email 163 Example Junk Mail Filter 164 Downloading Selected Messages 161 DUN 25 27 Detecting a connection 27 Duplicate Messages Due to Email Forrwarding 184 In your ISP POP3 Mailbox 185 Page 232 Edit LDAP Data 47 Edit User Information 199 Edit User Plan 199 Editing a List 86 Editing a User 46 Email Address Expansion 208 Email Client Software 121 127 136
126. atus Window VPOP3 has a Status window which can be viewed to see certain key VPOP3 status information To see the Status Window either run VPOP3 Status or choose the Status option on the VPOP3 Menu You should see a window like one of the ones below Connection Die Out Queue o In Queues E Last Poll 0121 98 17 01 2000 Next Pall Oo 0121 9819 00 00 Retrieving 65 Retrieving 66 Retrieving 26r Retrieving 68 Logged off CIs Connected to Demon server Logged on to Demon Logged off Demon POP3 Status ed Connected to Compuserve server Comme cion OoOo Dfe Logged on to Compuserve Logged off Compuserve Out Queue 0 In Queues Hanging up CRIP l COO 0298 2201 00 l Connected to CIP connection er Hest Poll 01722798 01 00 00 a en bed bm ee ee You switch between the two forms by double clicking on the window s title bar or using the control menu from this window This status window shows you e The current connection status if this is connected it will show a number in brackets which indicates the Mail Server number which is currently being connected to When connected this also contains two coloured bars The upper green bar shows the status of the POP3 connection retrieving messages and the lower blue bar shows the status of the SMTP connection sending messages e How many messages are waiting to be sent to your ISP e How many messages are waiting to be collecte
127. bounce message you want VPOP3 to generate This message can contain two replaceable entries e 1 unrecognised recipient s email address e 2 default domain you have specified on the Local Mail page Default Bounce Message If you don t specify a custom bounce message VPOP3 will use a message saying Delivery Failure Report The following message was incorrectly addressed Recipient is unrecognised Please contact postmaster yourdomain for further assistance VPOP3 stores the bounce message text in a file called BOUNCE MSG in the VPOP3 directory v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 21 VPOP3 Your email post office Remote Administration You can administer VPOP3 remotely using a web browser by telnet or by email Web Page Based Administration There is an HTTP administration server which is accessible by telling your web browser to connect to VPOP3 on port 5107 For example tell it to connect to http 192 168 0 1 5107 and enter your VPOP3 username and password Each link relates to the equivalent VPOP3 Settings tab For more information see the details about that tab VPOP3 Administration Mappimes Aliases ig Status Connection amp Outward Mail Definitions Inward Mail Administrator settings Mise settings Diagnostics cd Users Distribution amp Mailing Lists Connection Schedule Local Mail Handling Logeing Momitoring settings Message
128. bove v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 191 VPOP3 Your email post office Creating an External Router External Router Examples Virus check incoming message attachments How to Virus Check Incoming Attachments You can make VPOP3 check downloaded messages for viruses by using an External Router program This is a program batch file or script which is run whenever a message is downloaded from your ISP using the POP3 protocol We have described here an example of how you would set up an external router to use McAfee VirusScan to scan all incoming message attachments You could modify this if you wanted to use another virus scanner but note that the virus scanner must be able to be run from the command line to check specific files or directories and should return different result codes depending on whether a virus is detected or not a lot of modern virus scanners are not capable of being controlled from the command line so check first This example assumes the following directory structure c Windows Windows 95 c Program Files McAfee VirusScan scan exe c Program Files VPOP3 VPOP3 EXE c Program Files VPOP3 vscan bat c Program Files VPOP3 VScan unmime exe c Program Files VPOP3 VScan uud exe c Program Files VPOP3 Vscan Files In the VPOP3 VScan directory you will need two utilities called unmime and uud We obtained these from a shareware toolset called ESS Code 7 5 for DOS In the VPOP3 Extensions window def
129. button will bring up a dialog box very similar to that for adding a new user except that the User ID can t be modified Viewing a User s pending messages From this page it is also possible to view a user s message queue by pressing the Queue button Removing a User To delete a user press the Remove button You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the user Also if there are any messages waiting for that user you will have the opportunity to move them into another user s mailbox to be read choosing lt None gt from the list will cause them to be deleted Note there are possibly three users which you won t be able to remove 1 The Default User This user is normally the administrator There must always be someone who is nominated as the Default User Initially this will be the Postmaster user but you can change this on the Admin Property Page The Default User will receive any error messages which have been automatically generated by VPOP3 they may also receive any messages which are for a user who isn t defined in the Users list 2 The user specified to receive errors about Unknown Recipients of Incoming Mail Normally this is the same as the Default User above but you can change it on the Admin Property Page 3 The Currently Logged In Administrator This is the person who logged in in order to change the VPOP3 configuration The reason you can t delete this user is that VPOP3 wan
130. containing all messages waiting to be sent onto the Internet In the main part of the window you will see a list of all the messages waiting for this user You can see who the message is from what the subject is and the date time that it was sent If you want to Delete or View a message in a queue you must first Lock the mailbox or Out Queue When you close this window or view a different user s message queue any existing lock will automatically be released Note You may see the message BUSY in this window This happens if another component of VPOP3 is accessing the message file so the Queue Browser cannot view the message This is nothing to worry about Page 76 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Copying Messages between Mailboxes You can copy messages between mailboxes by going to the message queue browser selecting the messages and right clicking the mouse Then choose Copy Move from the menu Copy Move Messages ki ES CopyMove these evaluate messages to ar fiona fred Move goldmail guardian Cancel Infected mone Ei Help r Choose the mailbox you want to copy or move the messages into Press Copy to copy the messages into the selected mailbox leaving a copy in the original mailbox Press Move to move the messages into the selected mailbox deleting them from the original mailbox v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 77 VPOP3 Your email post office A
131. ction or occasionally during a connection VPOP3 will retry connections several times as below walt PostConnection Delay millisaconds Try to connect keep trying for ConnectRetryTime seconds do this ConnectRetryCo unt times until connection is made The Sequential POP3 gt SMTP Connection tells VPOP3 to connect first of all to the ISP POP3 server s then the ISP SMTP server Normally it will connect to both servers at once but this can cause connection problems with some modems amp ISPs Use Fastest POP3 Download Method If you choose this option VPOP3 will not issue a LIST command to the POP3 server when it logs on unless it needs to for download rules This can save several seconds of online time but it has the undesirable side effect of making the download progress bar move unevenly VPOP3 doesn t know how big each message is before it downloads it Anti SPAM Relay Protection Page 216 If a mail server such has VPOP3 has a permanent connection to the Internet you run the risk of email SPAMMERS finding the IP address of the mail server and using it to send junk email to other people on the Internet This is possible because VPOP3 has to be able to accept incoming SMTP connections to allow you to send outgoing messages By default VPOP3 cannot tell the difference between a legitimate user connecting to send outgoing messages or a Spammer connecting The Anti SPAM Relay Protection options l
132. cvessea ERSE E l6l Defining DOw load RUTES sscci 5 ss sccscsscscssssssessssscszssssassssacsssssss sosescuessseasises toestahvars N 162 DLRULES DAT File Format seeesessessessessessesseeseeseeseessesressesreoreoreoseeseoseoseeseoseessessessessesseoseereseeseereeseeseeseesseesee 162 Download Rules Rule Format esseessesssessesssesseessessseosessseoseesseoseeesseoseesseoseesseoseroseesetoseesseoseesteseosereseesseoseessees 162 RUICW BIS lilo ape eee eee eee mene EEEE E Nr rte 162 UERGE pla lf dc a ie eeeeres renee cette eerste E E I yy arene ere 163 EECA e scien E A sr ss seco ov veo once ss cs ca da Sn Sec ee A T eee acacacaeae 163 Download Rule Example Only Download One Person s Email eeesessssssesecececseesesececececssseeeeeeees 163 Example Download Rules A Junk Mail Filter ee eesssssecesecssssesecesecscsssesececececssscseeecececssscesseeeeeeees 164 VPOP3 Security 165 Email Forwarding 166 Logging Property Page 167 Daily Summaries 168 ReSCrICtING Server ACCES Sinnani a a n ET E E ORG 169 Administrat r Auto Logon eieiei acess TN 70 SRUEEINS Down VP ORS vissciercererrerarer nnn aren nnenun ean an anaianaiie 70 Internet Mail Protocols 171 SY hal RL aa wf 2 fo peer ener E ne ere nee ne Ore pn Mr RR ery rere ey ery ren ee errr errr et 17 POPS Protocolos aKT i T T TEE 72 PAGANI SOE SF a 8 hte each te a8 hae sch ca task ee cette hse cottage teen seatele 212 Page 6 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email
133. d Addresses enter your email domain Enable Route Local Mail Locally In Local Mail Domains enter your email domain 5 Go to the Misc Page If your ISP wil automatically detect you going online and start sending you your email do nothing here If you need to do something to tell your ISP that you are online you will need to add a Post Connection VPOP3 Extension which will have to trigger the connection Contact VPOP3 support for more help with this 6 Go to the Users Page and define your local users 7 Go to the Schedule Page and define your connection schedule Connection through a Proxy Server Because incoming SMTP mail requires a connection to be made FROM the Internet TO VPOP3 you cannot normally collect incoming mail using SMTP through a Proxy Server the Proxy Server should reject incoming connections In this case you will need to place VPOP3 on the Internet side of the proxy server Permanent connection to the Internet 1 Go to the Connection Page 1 Choose Use LAN for Connection 2 Check Use with Simple Schedule 2 Go to the In Mail Page 1 Choose SMTP Incoming 2 In Wait for up to lt n gt seconds for an incoming connection enter zero 0 Because you have a permanent connection to the Internet incoming mail will normally be sent directly to VPOP3 across the Internet 3 In Use Connections select the connection you defined above 3 Go to the Out Mail Page 1 Choose SMTP 2 Enter the name of your ISP
134. d Inner Circle Subject SSS From UKcallsave aol com From shopnsave juno com From more success network net To World Friends Planet earth To anybody yahoo com From XXX To friend everywhere com To Mailman newdomain com To justice for all dialaccess com To change what happens to junk email you can change the action in the first line to be ASk about Spam or gt Sspambox lt Redirect spam into the spambox mailbox Page 164 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office VPOP3 Security This section is about security of the VPOP3 software itself There are various configuration options which increase or decrease the security level of the VPOP3 software to allow you to choose the level of convenience or security which you desire The normal settings are e Anyone can shutdown the VPOP3 software this is simply to allow easy shutdown for beginning users who would otherwise have problems e You have to log on to have access to the VPOP3 property pages e Only administrators can initiate connections directly You can control who can shutdown VPOP3 on the Misc Property Page with the Allow Shutdown from Menu option If this option is enabled then anyone with access to the VPOP3 server can choose Shutdown Server from the VPOP3 icon If this option is disabled only administrators can shutdown the server by going to the Admin Property Page and pressing the Shutdown VPOP3 button You can control w
135. d by your email client software e When the last connection to any ISP Mail Server took place e When the next scheduled connection will take place if any e On the large format window you also see a summary of what VPOP3 has been doing recently If you right click an item VPOP3 will show the full text in case part of it was off the right of the window and the date time the event occurred Page 4 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office In Queues If you press the In Queues button you will be shown a list like this User Queue Summary x This simply shows the number of messages waiting for each user Administrators can look at the queues using the Queue Browser on page 76 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 75 VPOP3 Your email post office Queue Browser VPOP3 has a queue browser facility This lets you see which messages are waiting in a user s mailbox and also which messages are waiting to be sent onto the Internet Only administrators can use this facility To use this facility go to the Users property page and press Queue or double click on a user s ID Message Queue Browser Ei E4 Queue Marne simon Lock Mailbox To View or Delete messages you must first press Lock Mailbox Delete VIEW At the top of the window you will see a drop down list called Queue Name this contains a list of all the mailboxes and also a Queue called OutQueue this is the queue
136. d mail through a single host lt IP address of the VPOP3 computer gt Then in the VPOP3 directory create a text file called SMTPEFWD DAT and puta line in it yourdomain lt IP address of Exchange Server gt This tells VPOP3 to send all incoming mail for anyone yourdomain to the SMTP service on the Exchange Server computer Notes You may also want to edit the Postmaster user in VPOP3 so that it forwards all administrator mail to Exchange Server as well do this by specifying a Forward To address in the VPOP3 Edit User box of SMTP lt administrator gt lt exchange server IP address gt Note that if you do this if VPOP3 has problems with LAN forwarding you won t be able to see the error messages because it won t be able to forward them Importing Exporting External Address Book You can import or export the VPOP3 External Address book entries to a CSV file This is a text format file which can be created or read by most spreadsheet or database programs You import or export the external address book by going to the Users page pressing Advanced pressing Edit External Address Book and then pressing the Import or Export button as appropriate Page 114 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Schedule Property Page Scheduling is one of the most useful features of VPOP3 There are three schedule modes Manual this isn t really a schedule mode it means that you only connect
137. d press the Edit Text button Alternatively you can edit the AUTORESPOND TMXT file in the user s mailbox directory You will be shown a text editor window using the NOTEPAD program In this window you enter text which defines the response which will be sent when messages arrive in the mailbox In the simplest case simply type the text which you want to respond with into the AutoResponder file When the response is sent it will have the following attributes e It will be sent to the person who sent the original message to the autoresponder mailbox e It will appear to come from the AutoResponder mailbox using the email domain defined in Domain to Add to Unqualified Addresses on the Local Mail Property Page e The subject line will be the same as the incoming message subject except it will have Re added to the beginning of the line Autoresponder Options You may also want to set the Keep and Only Once options on the Add Edit User window Page 78 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office e Set Keep to keep the message in the mailbox after the response has been sent if Keep is not enabled the message will be removed once the response has been generated You can override this by using the lt Keep gt and lt NoKeep gt response definition tags e Set Only Once to make VPOP3 keep a log of which email addresses have already been responded to so that VPOP3 will not respond to the same emai
138. d to obtain information about a person There are two sets of information User Information This can only be set by an administrator and can contain whatever you feel appropriate for instance real name extension number job title etc User Plan This is a bit of information that the user themselves can modify by email see Mailer_Daemon or using a web browser see Mail HTTP Server v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 53 VPOP3 Your email post office Remove Postmaster User To Remove the Postmaster user you need to perform the following steps 1 Create another VPOP3 user who has administrator rights 2 Log out of the Property Pages and log back on as this new user 3 Goto the Admin Property Page and change the Default User to another user instead of Postmaster Go back to the Users Property Page and remove Postmaster You should also go to the Mappings Property Page and create a Mapping of Postmaster gt lt your administrator gt The last step must be performed when you have your own email domain because the Postmaster email address should always exist Mailbox Mappings Mailbox mappings aliases are a very useful feature of VPOP3 they allow an email address to be Mapped to a different user s mailbox What is a Mapping A Mapping or alias is a rule which tells VPOP3 that a message to a certain email address needs to be placed into a certain mailbox or list Normally VPOP3 will place mail addresse
139. d to jim a valid domain into the jim mailbox If this is not what you want to achieve you can use Mappings to tell VPOP3 to send the message to a different mailbox You cannot use Mappings to tell VPOP3 to send the message to an external email address So if you want mail for j carston a valid domain to go to the jim mailbox set up a mapping from j carston gt jim You can also set up mappings from explicit name domain addresses rather than just name valid domain entries If you want mail for j carston bibble com to go to the jim mailbox set up a mapping from j carston widgets com jim There are other special mapping formats you can use see the list below Possible Email Address entries in Mappings name VPOP3 will send mail addressed to name valid domain to the chosen mailbox name domain com VPOP3 will send mail addressed to name domain to the chosen mailbox domain com VPOP3 will send mail addressed to lt anyone gt domain com to the chosen mailbox domain com VPOP3 will send mail addressed to lt any unrecognised Page 54 name gt domain com to the chosen mailbox User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office in user domain com VPOP3 will only check the mapping on incoming email not on local or outgoing email from user domain com VPOP3 to use this mapping to compare the FROM address in the header of the incoming email instead of the recipient address es it only
140. ddress book to LDAP server e Allow user to specify a sound when mail arrives via POP3 e Create a CONNECT LOG showing all connections and summaries of connection activity v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 13 VPOP3 Your email post office Add Max Post Size to mailing list configuration Add a HTTP server to allow people to read their mail using a web browser Add ListServer to Mapping target list Handle Resent From field as well as From and Sender fields Allow disconnection of LAN connections Add support for right clicking status window items to get more information What s new in VPOP3 V1 2 6 Page 14 Flush registry changes after changes should hopefully make the changes stick even if NT crashes due to other software before shutdown Change VPOP3 to use DAT files now instead of TMP files Add External routing facility through external software Add USERS command to ListServer Add Custom Unsubscribe message for mailing lists Allow reporting of bad messages to ListServer to the administrator Support LDAP V3 as well as V2 for Outlook Express Outlook 98 Add Received header when downloading using POP3 for tracing Allow restricting access to POP3 amp SMTP servers by client IP address Add SlowPosting attribute to mailing lists sends a copy of the message to each member with their address in the To field rather than a single copy with each member BCC
141. de to be invisible from the internet whilst being visible from an intranet so security isn t a problem VPOP3 can negotiate a session via a SOCKS V4 compliant firewall or proxy so you don t need to meddle with your Internet Security policy just to have proper Email Tested with Pegasus mail Microsoft Internet Mail Microsoft Outlook amp Windows Messaging Eudora mail Netscape mail and more User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Only one machine needs to run VPOP3 under Windows 95 or NT all other machines on the LAN run a standard Internet mail client and can use any operating system Win 3 1 Win 95 Win NT Mac OS 2 UNIX DOS VPOP3 can run either as a normal background program on the taskbar in Windows 95 or NT4 0 or it can be set up to run as an NT service VPOP3 Requirements VPOP3 should be installed on a machine which has Internet connectivity It can connect to the Internet over a LAN or via RAS DUN VPOP3 will automatic connect and disconnect as necessary If you are going to access VPOP3 from email client software on other machines on a network those machines need to be connected to the VPOP3 server with a TCP IP network VPOP3 should only be installed on a single machine per LAN email is read sent using normal internet mailing software such as Microsoft Internet Mail Eudora etc VPOP3 needs to run on a Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 machine The other machines on the networ
142. ding button to import a set of email forwarding rules using distribution lists Import Forwarding List Look in Ej vpop3 z licence bt Er s order twt Pal UES LIL ree I readme txt Ea J lo prt III z whatsner bet File name fwvclist tat Files of type TXT Files Cancel Help Don t Import Forwarding To pses c0 uk M Remove forwardings to above address M Replace Existing Forwardings which match This will import a text file and create a set of distribution lists containing forwarding rules from a local name to a single remote user There are three options in the Import dialog e Don t Import Forwarding To xxxx This tells VPOP3 to ignore any forwarding rules where the target is xxxx e Remove forwardings to the above address This tells VPOP3 to remove any existing forwarding rules where the target is xxxx e Replace Existing Forwardings which match This tells VPOP3 to replace any existing forwarding rules which exist in the imported file The file being imported should be a text file with a single forwarding rule per line blank lines and lines beginning with are ignored The first entry on each line should be the local name and the second entry should be the remote email address The two entries should be separated by spaces or tab characters So if you want to forward email for local name margaret to the email address maggie isponline com you would have the following
143. ding the POP3 protocol like Demon Internet Services or by adding special header fields eg Delivered To which VPOP3 can use if you tell it about them Page 40 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office What happens to Mail for an Unrecognised User An email message will bounce if it is sent to an email server which rejects it and sends it back to the sender with an error message You can tell VPOP3 to bounce messages on the Admin page v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 41 VPOP3 Your email post office Local Mail Settings Local Mail Property Page VPOP3 can act as a local mail server as well as an Internet mail gateway The Local Mail property page tells VPOP3 how to do this POP3 Settings Ei Ei Misc Headers Logging l Diagnostics Info Connection l Irni Flail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Uses Mappings Lits TocaMai Admin Domain to add to unqualitted addresses pcs co uk M Route Local Mail Locally Local Mail Configuration Local Mail Domains pses co uk Send local mail for unrecognised users to SP SMTP Forwarding Unlimited SMTP D users Edit SMTP Forwarding Domain to add to Unqualified Addresses When a message is sent either by a user or automatically by VPOP3 all the addresses in the message header should be fully qualified with an email domain as well as a user name The first field Domain to add to unqualified
144. directory contains configuration information about that list HEADER CFG Header modifiers LIST CFG The list configuration and members list WELCOME MSG The custom welcome message for the list In the Users Mailbox subdirectories Each user has a subdirectory named after them This directory contains the messages waiting for each user to read I DAT Messages waiting to be read A DAT Archived message files that VPOP3 found an problem with The author may want to know about these D DAT Files which would have been deleted but you had the Keep Temporary Files box checked on the Diagnostics page R DAT Files which are waiting to be processed by an AutoResponder AUTORESPOND TXT Text definition of a simple autoresponder AUTORESPOND CMD Command for an external autoresponder AUTORESPOND LOG List of responded to addresses if Only Once is chosen as an AutoResponder option USERINFO TXT User information returned by the Finger Server v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 197 VPOP3 Your email post office USERPLAN TXT User plan returned by the Finger Server Finger Server VPOP3 includes an optional Finger server Enabling Finger Server Access If the VPOP3 finger server is enabled by default it will only reveal user email addresses and whether or not they have any waiting email such as UserId paul Email Address paul testdomain co uk User has waiting messages Note that it is possible to limit
145. down list You add remove time entries using the New and Remove buttons Each scheduled time can either always connect to retrieve send mail or only connect if a certain number of messages are waiting to be sent This threshold can be set individually for each scheduled time or it can use a Default threshold In the Time List all the scheduled times are listed in four columns 1 This is an icon which indicates whether the time is an Always Connect or a Connect if n waiting entry C means Always Connect Sail means Connect if n waiting 2 This is the scheduled connection time in 24 hour notation 3 This is the connection threshold D means use the Default threshold 4 This is the Connection which the scheduled time applies to Note that more than one may be listed When setting a Complex Schedule note that each possible time can only have one Always Connect or Connect if n waiting setting and one threshold level So you cannot tell VPOP3 to always connect to Connection 1 at 16 30 but only connect to Connection 2 at 16 30 if there are messages waiting to be sent You would have to always connect to both Connections 1 amp 2 or only connect to Connections 1 amp 2 if there are messages waiting to be sent If you press the Edit Schedule button VPOP3 will run Notepad with SCHEDULE DAT loaded When Notepad is closed VPOP3 will reload the Complex Schedule from the file If you press the Reload Schedule button VPOP3 will reload the
146. dows NT starts and users will be able to send and receive local mail as well as Internet mail iki If you choose the Start VPOP3 Now option you should see a small icon looking like a British red post box in the notification tray on the Windows taskbar That s it it s installed and running Now you just need to configure it The VPOP3 Setup Helper is there to assist User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office VPOP3 Menu In the Windows 95 NT task bar there should be a small icon which you can right click to see a short menu Depending on your configuration options on the Misc Property Page this menu might be Help Properties Open Status Shutdown Server if Allow Connections from Menu is disabled Or Help Properties Open Status Connect Now d Hangup how Shutdown Server if Allow Connections from Menuis enabled The Help menu option takes you to the VPOP3 Help file contents The Properties option takes you to the VPOP3 Property Pages you may need to Log On first The Open Status option shows the VPOP3 Status Window The Connect Now option lets you force an immediate connection to the Internet Provider See Dialling from the Menu The Hangup Now option forces VPOP3 to drop the current dial up connection The Shutdown Server option lets you close down VPOP3 this option can be disabled with the Allow Shutdown from Menu option on the Misc Property Page
147. dropped the dial up connection manually Socket Error 10060 Operation Timed Out Page 226 This error is quite self explanatory It means that Windows reported that a connection attempt or idle connection timed out If this error occurs during a connection attempt eg ina VPOP3 SMTP Client connection problem error message it means that Windows couldn t connect to the ISP mail server within a fixed time the timeout limit is fixed within Windows itself This problem can either mean that your ISP is having a problem that you are connecting through a slow proxy You can assign retry parameters on the Tuning page or that your Dial up connection is faulty User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office If this error occurs whilst a connection is in progress eg ina VPOP3 POP3 Client Problem error message it means that the connection was idle for a set time this set time can be changed on the VPOP3 Misc page Socket Error 10061 The attempt to connect was forcefully rejected This means that the computer which VPOP3 was trying to connect to probably at your ISP refused the connection from the computer running VPOP3 This can either mean that the ISP server you specified was not running a mail service on the appropriate Port that your ISP is having problems with their servers or that your ISP s mail servers are too busy to accept new connections Socket Error 10503 No More Data This means that
148. dules 115 116 117 Timed Connections 115 116 Timeouts 206 Sockets 206 Transmission Receipts 200 TroubleShooting 216 225 Tuning Parameters 216 Tweaks 221 Unrecognised Users 212 213 Unsubscribing from Mailing Lists 97 Urgent Messages 200 Usage Logs 168 Use Connections 29 User Database 59 60 202 Export 59 60 Import 60 202 203 User Forwarding 56 210 215 User Groups 57 User Information 199 User Lists 85 86 USERINFO TXT 199 USERPLAN TXT 199 Users 44 46 Adding 46 Editing 46 Settings 46 48 Users Property Page 44 Uses for External Routers 192 Using A VPOP3 Mailing List 89 Using Multiple ISP Email Accounts 104 Using the LDAP service in Calypso 160 Using the LDAP service in Eudora Pro 4 135 Using the LDAP service in Netscape Messenger 4 158 Using the LDAP service in Outlook 98 151 Valid Domains 54 Page 236 VCF File Support 191 Version Number 99 Viewing Input Queues 71 Viewing Messages 71 Viewing Output Queue 71 VPOP3 Closing 170 Errors 225 VPOP3 POP3 Client Connection Problem 225 VPOP3 POP3 Client Problem 225 VPOP3 SMTP Client Connection Problem 226 VPOP3 Connects each time a message is sent 229 VPOP3 File Transfer Method 42 219 VPOP3 File Transfer Outgoing 42 VPOP3 Icon 207 VPOP3 Menu 20 120 VPOP3 Requirements 10 VPOP3 Security 165 VPOP3 slows down stops when downloading or uploading large messages or messages with attachments 229
149. e email client in Eudora go to Special Change Password If you are not using an email client which supports this the user can still do it themselves using a Telnet Program 1 Telnet to the VPOP3 server on port 106 To do this in Windows 95 or NT run Telnet lt vpop3 server gt 106 So if your VPOP3 server is at address 192 168 57 1 run Telnet 192 168 57 1 106 Page 72 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 2 VPOP3 Your email post office 2 VPOP3 should greet you with a line 200 VPOP3 Hello who are you type USER lt userid gt Type USER followed by your user ID note you won t be able to see what you type unless you turn Local Echo on Terminal Preferences Local Echo 3 VPOP3 should now say 200 Now enter your password type PASS lt password gt Type PASS followed by your current password 4 VPOP3 will now say 200 Now type NEWPASS lt new password gt Type NEWPASS followed by your new password Your new password can not be the same as your old password and must be more than 2 characters in length 5 VPOP3 will acknowledge the password change by saying 200 New password accepted Thanks Now type QUIT to close the session Note Users can also change their password and other settings using an web browser See Changing Password using a Web Browser on page 71 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 73 VPOP3 Your email post office St
150. e User For instance you may have a domain widgets com now most people widgets com are at your site but you may have certain users e g karen who are at a different site Because you will have specified the Local Domains as including the widgets com domain then VPOP3 will try to send mail to karen widgets com to a local user called karen Since karen is not really a local user the message will fail to be sent To get around this problem you would create a VPOP3 mapping of karen to the REMOTE pseudo mailbox This tells VPOP3 that mail to a local name of karen is actually remote even though it appears to be local so VPOP3 will queue that message to be sent to the ISP instead of trying to send it locally Also if VPOP3 downloads a message to a user called karen it will simply ignore the message if it s CCed to other users as well they will still receive their copy This feature is useful if you are using a single email account for mail to more than one site and therefore more than one VPOP3 server Note On the Admin Property Page you can tell VPOP3 to treat all unrecognised users as if they have a REMOTE mapping User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Note If you are doing this there are several things you should be aware of 1 Your ISP may prohibit this type of use 2 If both VPOP3 servers connect to the same ISP POP3 mailbox at the same time one of them will be refused access 3 You ne
151. e following order Page 108 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office mailbox name in parentheses inside lt gt mailbox name in parentheses outside lt gt or without lt gt mailbox name with or without quotes either single or double outside lt gt me ODO N e just use normal recipient name If VPOP3 finds a name but it doesn t match a recognised mailbox name it will try the next option so if a message was addressed to tim lt joe hotmail com sarah gt VPOP3 will send the message to tim not sarah because the sarah mailbox does not exist Note that some email software primarily some email clients and some email gateway systems such as those on Compuserve will remove or modify the comment or text portion of the name so messages may become mis addressed If this happens VPOP3 will send the message to the Main Administrator for manual processing Routing According To the Message Subject With this routing option VPOP3 will search the subject line of incoming messages looking for a special bit of text This method isn t very reliable but it is the only option in some cases The search text has the format lt prefix gt lt suffix gt The represents the location of the intended recipient s name The default entry means that VPOP3 will search the subject line for the recipient s name surrounded by and So a subject line containing the text fred wo
152. e server to reject messages based on any other criteria apart from the data contained in the Envelope i e From or To addresses Also once the message has been sent to an SMTP server the client typically discards its copy This means that if VPOP3 is running as your SMTP server to receive mail from your Internet Provider useful features such as being able to limit message download size the Download Rules leaving messages on the ISP server etc cannot be used When sending messages to another site there are really two ways of doing this both of which are typically accepted 1 The mail server can send the message directly to the destination site s mail server 2 The mail server can send the message to a relay server which then sends the message to the destination site We recommend the use of the second method The reasons for this are twofold 1 It is easier to configure and fits in with most users understanding of how mail works 2 It is a lot quicker over a dial up connection If the first method is used any message to more than one recipient typically has to be sent multiple times once for each recipient There is also a lot of querying of DNS servers which can be time consuming v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 171 VPOP3 Your email post office POP3 Protocol Page 172 POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3 was created for dial up Internet accounts because of the limitations with the SMTP protocol Whe
153. e their output redirected to nul This is a special filename which simply causes their output to be discarded This is so that the command output doesn t confuse VPOP3 when it s checking for any redirection commands in the program output If you are using this program you must disable McAfee VShield scanning on file copies If you do not when the unmime or uud command unpacks an infected file into the vscan files directory VShield will detect the virus and go into alert mode asking the user what to do with the file This will stop the computer doing anything else until a user has responded If you are using McAfee VirusScan you must be using V3 1 5 or later the scan program from V3 1 4 and earlier didn t work properly under Windows 95 User Manual Page 193 VPOP3 Your email post office File Attachments File attachments sent by Internet email must be converted to a text form before sending The two common forms are MIME and UUENCODING Because attachments are sent in text form VPOP3 doesn t have to do anything special to transmit files they are simply sent as very large text files Related Topics Page 194 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Files VPOP3 Uses General VPOP3INST DAT Zero length file indicating that this directory was created by VPOP3 In the main VPOP3 Directory ADMINALLOWED DAT Restricts access to VPOP3 s Administration Servers AUTORESPONSE CTL Tem
154. e you are searching for and select the VPOP3 directory 2 Press Search button to do the search Doing more Complex Searches If you choose Edit Search Directory from the Address Book menu you can make more complex searches on specific LDAP fields LDAP with Calypso Setting up the LDAP service in Calypso To set up Calypso to use VPOP3 as an LDAP server go to the Edit menu in Calypso and choose Search LDAP Directory Calypso LDAP Search OF x LDAP Server Fourl1 Directory Edit Server List Object Critieria Fatter Clear Search Name contains Help AND E mail Address contains AND Phone Number contains AND Organization contains 5 Mame lt E mail Address Compan Phone Number For Help press F1 Page 158 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Press the Edit Server List button Edit Server List Fourl Directory InfoSpace Directory WhoW here Directory Bigfoot Directory Switchboard Directory Press the New button Edit S BT YET ki x e C o In Description type the name you want to call this LDAP server eg VPOP3 In LDAP server type the IP address of the VPOP3 server Leave Search root blank Leave Port number at 389 You will normally want to leave the Maximum number of hits at 100 but you can change this if you wish 1 2 3 4 5 ON Leave Need to login unchecked 7 Press OK OK v 1 3 0 May 1999 Us
155. eas E NEE 56 Setting the Assistant eeesessessesssessesresressesseoreoseeseeseessessesresrtereoseossessroseereeseeseoseeseeseeseseossoseessessesreoseessessrsreesees 56 Assistant SPEClal FEatUNES inn a e EEE 57 What are Valid Domains 57 Monitorme Messages yuna a a a E a A 58 REMOTE USET S aroi a T T E geccaetacntaccteseeesbine mesteeceac sansa 58 User Message FOrWall GINS scscceccssiarssscscussssrsssersseennnenenssserneeenanannnrarradnanee a onan AARAA ALCEE CEECEE CCEC E RaRa 59 Pas S70 CRS ol a manner a es anr rr er nr ee EE rere Eerie eee Re SENSO 72 Monitoring ba tol lt 1 ee ent Pe PORE REET ERR ERESESEEE IER UPE EA 60 Jeer GFOUDS onanan enone ee een ne ee eee ee 60 What are User Car Ouse 2 224ccccccccececaccessecececcsecesesescececscecasescscscecscscececscscscscucucucecececescscseseseecceseduvevevavevensenseexcecstees 60 DENNA OUI Seas c sees esececeseses es EEEE teense reteset 60 Maintain WISE Gir OU DS seid cd ch czcsesesenecxexsscosecanscsnsascasnsnonananenananananananananaeaoaneaaseaeaeneneansnananannnsduv ecsecededided adsspsensnade 62 Export User DataBase sepccsesascecevessesesesteocasentoucsectbeusneshsceacdeedtecscuadsans e 62 Exported User Database CSV Format csscsscsssssssssscescssssessscesessscessecseessscesessseseeecsnees 63 CSV Formats Least IN OrMA t Ouers istre eee EE EEEE E E E EE OE 63 CSV Format PassWord S scaiccsscesesscossonssnassensevensenazssnsensanensnsvsennanosensesensaneassnsensupavenasvsun
156. ections tells VPOP3 to keep a log of all the data which gets sent between the SMTP client in VPOP3 and your ISP s mail server The data is stored in SMTPCLT LOG v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 175 VPOP3 Your email post office e The Max Size settings set how big in kilobytes each of the log files should become When a log file reaches the maximum size it is renamed to lt name gt OLD and a new log file is created e The Tuning button takes you to the Tuning Window where you can set some advanced options Effect on Performance of Logging e The Log xxxx Server Connections options can slow the sending and receiving of large messages on your network by a considerable amount e The Log xxxx Client Connections options shouldn t make a noticeable difference unless you have a fast Internet connection e The Log Level setting shouldn t make a noticeable difference to performance at all unless you are sending to mailing lists with large numbers of users VPOP3 processes each recipient address and writes a lot of log data for each one if full logging is turned on Disable InMail methods using Mailer Daemon Using this methods you can control any In Mail methods which have a Routing method of Send Only To lt USERNAME gt To disable all In Mail methods which are set to send mail only to your mailbox send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Disable InMail The message text should contain the lines USERNAM
157. ed a VPOP3 licence for each site 4 There is no enforceable method of preventing one site downloading mail for another site If that is all acceptable read on If not there are other ways of achieving a similar effect See the Distributed Sites topic for more details If you have 4 users in two offices Sue and James in office 1 and Philip and Karen in office 2 first of all it is best to arbitrarily designate one office as being the main office as far as your email configuration is concerned it is probably best for the main office to be the one where your technical person is based For this example we will say that office 1 is the main office We will also say that Sue is the technical person and that the email domain is bobble com You will need two configurations Office 1 This should have the following configurations e A user called sue e A user called james e A mapping of philip to REMOTE e A mapping of karen to REMOTE Office 2 This should have the following configurations e A user called philip e A user called karen e On the Admin Property Page you should have Treat as REMOTE for what VPOP3 should do with messages to unrecognised users Note you should NOT have this setting in Office 1 otherwise badly addressed messages will simply disappear without trace If you want to set up any autoresponders or further distribution mailing lists it is recommended that you manage them at
158. ee e Require a password to post If you have told VPOP3 to limit who can post to members or moderators VPOP3 looks at the From entry in the incoming email header to decide who the message is coming from Defining who can send messages to the list You can limit who can send messages to this list Allow Anyone to post messages VPOP3 allows any person to send messages to this mailing list Allow Members to post messages VPOP3 will check the From address of all incoming messages and compare it with the list members to see if they are a member of the list If they are the message will be posted to the list otherwise it won t If you leave both these options turned off only moderators are allowed to send messages to the list Page 94 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office If you restrict message sending to members and or moderators VPOP3 relies on the From header field to know who the incoming message has come from It is not too hard to fake this if you know how so if you are worried about this you may want to use the Password Posting option In this case all messages posted to the group including those posted by moderators must be validated with a password The validation is performed by surrounding the password with angle brackets lt password gt and placing it in the message subject This validation string will be removed before the message is distributed to the list
159. eeserve net Configuring VPOP3 for Global Net To configure VPOP3 for use with Global Net www globalnet co uk Go to the In Mail page 1 Choose the POP3 Incoming method 2 In POP3 Server Address type mail globalnet co uk 3 In User Id type your Global Net user name 4 In Password type your Global Net password 5 In Accepted Domains type lt account gt globalnet co uk lt account gt globalnet co uk 6 Press the Routing button Choose According To Recipient Go to the Out Mail page 1 Choose the SMTP method 2 In SMTP Relay Servers type smtpmail globalnet co uk Configuring VPOP3 for Compuserve You can tell VPOP3 to connect to a Compuserve Mail Account if you do the following 1 First of all you need to set up a POP3 mail account with Compuserve contact Compuserve s support desk for help with this 2 Next you can tell VPOP3 to access your POP3 mail account using either RPA Remote Passphrase Authentication or normal POP3 authentication Most Internet providers use the normal authentication method but Compuserve used to use only RPA and have recently changed it to allow either method To use normal POP3 authentication set up VPOP3 as for any other Internet provider account Page 112 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office To use RPA you need to install the RPA software from Compuserve on the computer running VPOP3 and then specify the POP3 Username as RPA instead
160. email post office SMTP Enter the IP address of your VPOP3 server the bit after the in the Pop Account setting Ph This protocol isn t supported by VPOP3 so leave it blank unless you are using another server for them Finger If you have enabled the VPOP3 Finger Server enter the IP address of your VPOP3 server here the same as the SMTP setting Checking Mail Options ea Category POP account paua 932 168 57 1 Check for mal every fo minutes Skip messages over fao K in size MW Send on check MW Save password Getting Started Leave mal on server T Delete from server after jo daps Determine first unread message by f First message not read by this machine Status headers C POPS LAST command Delete from server when emptied fram Trash i re Authentication style Sending Mail Passwords C Kerberos APOP ce POP Account This should already have been entered as above Check for mail every This is how often Eudora should ask VPOP3 if there is any new mail for you If you enter 0 you have to manually tell Eudora to check for new mail Skip big messages I recommend you turn this off Leave Mail On Server I recommend you turn this off Authentication Style This must be set to Passwords The other options can be set or cleared as you desire v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 129 VPOP3 Your email post office Sending Mail Return Address S
161. er You can tell VPOP3 to change a group s settings in one easy step thus changing the settings of all the members in that group What settings can be assigned to groups A group has a subset of the user settings which may be applicable to more than one user See the Add User help for information on most of these settings e Administrator e Put User in Everyone List e Allow Sending of Internet Mail e Monitor Messages e Enabled This allows the administrator to enable disable an entire groups access to email at once e Change Internet Mail Reply Address To e Max Internet Outgoing Message Size e With some of these settings the Group setting overrides the user setting with other settings it s the other way around Defining Groups You can define a Group by going to the Users gt Advanced gt Define User Groups window and pressing Add or Edit Page 60 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Define User Group Ei E4 Group Name I M Administrator I Put User in Everyone list lM Allow Sending of Internet Mail IY Monitor Messages MW Enabled Allow access to mailbox T Force User Configuration to match these settings Change Internet Mail Reply Address to Max Internet Outgoing Size 0 kB no lirit cresi ie _ This lets you set common properties for a group of users Administrator Put User in Everyone list Allow Sending of Internet Mail Monitor
162. er Manual Page 159 VPOP3 Your email post office Using the LDAP service in Calypso When you have set up Calypso you go to the Edit menu in Calypso and choose the Search LDAP Directory option Calypso LDAP Search OF x LDAP Server yPOP3 Edit Server List Object Critieria Patten Clear Search Name begins with li Help AND E mail Address contains la AND Phone Humber contains AND Organization contains S Mame E mail Address Compan Phone Number ra faxt ipscs co uk CT fiona honatpscs co uk 1 Select the directory service you added in the LDAP Server list at the top of the window 2 Enter the search criteria you want 3 Press Search to do the search Page 160 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Download Rules Download rules are a set of conditions which can be used to control which messages get downloaded which don t and other functions like redirection This can be useful for preventing the download of junk email messages Download rules are enabled if 1 You are downloading messages using POP3 2 You have specified that messages get left on the server for at least one day you do this from the In Mail Configuration Page 3 You havea valid DLRULES DAT file The format of this file is described below Note If you do enable download rules connections will generally take longer but they may save lots of time if you get
163. er which indicates the action which VPOP3 should take if the rule is triggered asterisk Means this is a Delete If rule At sign Means this is a Delete Silently If rule tilde Means this is an Ignore If rule less than Means this is a Download If rule precent Means this is a Download and Delete If rule question mark Means this is an Ask If rule Page 162 greater than Means this is a Redirect If rule The name of the rule starts immediately after the lt or gt The name is only used for reporting purposes This is a Delete Rule The exception to this is a Redirect If rule In this case the name of the real recipient immediately follows the gt character and is terminated by a lt For instance gt recipient lt This is a Redirect rule User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office When a rule is triggered which involves a notification message eg Ask If or Delete If the message sent to the intended recipient or default user includes the name of the rule so it can be helpful to make the name meaningful or at least unique Rule Conditions Rule conditions specify what text should appear in which header fields in order to match the rule A rule condition starts with an optional exclamation mark which means that the entry in negated i e the text must NOT appear in the header field The rule condition line is then lt fieldname gt lt text to ma
164. ers specify a list of one or more possible telephone numbers to dial separated by semicolons Each time VPOP3 dials it will pick one of these numbers at random to override the default telephone number for the appropriate Connection v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 221 VPOP3 Your email post office LAN Forwarding VPOP3 has a feature we call LAN forwarding previously known as SMTP forwarding This means that VPOP3 will forward messages intended for specified recipients onto another SMTP server on your network NOTE VPOP3 will not forward messages using this facility over a dial up connection To do that see the Out Mail Property Page or Forwarding Messages You can configure LAN forwarding in three possible ways e Use a text file called SMTPFWD DAT in the VPOP3 directory see below for details on the format of this file e Specify an address like SMTP user host in the Forward To box in the Edit User window e Use the Forward To another LAN Mail Server option on the In Mail gt Routing window and specify an address like user host SMTPFWD DAT File Format This file has a simple format Each line of this file represents an LAN forwarding rule The syntax of these lines is original recipient smtp server address new RCPT TO line Original Recipient The Original Recipient part specifies the email address of the person whose email you want to forward onto the SMTP server This can be e a
165. ervice provider has given WOU f Log on using POP account name paui Password ia four password will appear as asterisks to prevent others from reading tt C Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA lt Back Cancel Help Choose Log on using POP account name and enter the Username defined in VPOP3 for the mailbox you want to access In Password enter the Password defined in VPOP3 for the mailbox you want to access Press Next to name your Outlook Express Account Internet Connection Wizard Friendly Name Information about your Internet e mail account i grouped together and labeled with a friendly name This can be any name you want Choose a friendly name for this e mail account Interet mall account name vpopy lt Back Cancel Help In Internet mail account name just enter a name which you want this account to be called This is only for display purposes on your own PC Page 142 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Press Next to tell Outlook Express how to connect to VPOP3 Internet Connection Wizard Select Connect using my local area network LAN Press Next followed by Finish Outlook Express Edit Account After pressing Edit in the Outlook Express Accounts list you should get the windows below v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 143 VPOP3 Your email post office General Tab paul Properties E General Security
166. esessesesesesresesessese Routing According To the Message Subject s ssssesesessssesessssesessesesessese Common ISP Settings Configuring VPOP3 for Demon Internet Services ssssssesossssesessssesese0 Configuring VPOP3 for CIX Internet sessssesesessssesesessesesessssesesesssresesess Configuring VPOP3 for ClakalN etaren eneee Ea Configuring VPOP3 for Freeserve csscsssscssssscessscsssssesessecesseseceeesceeees Configuring VPOP3 for Global Net sesessesessssesesesessesesessesesesessesesessese Configuring VPOP3 for Compuserve s seessssesesessesesesesresesessosesesssseseseseese v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual P 99 100 100 10 10 214 103 Error 3 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 ee ee 110 See 10 eee I P T E I EE E 12 EE E R 12 Page 5 VPOP3 Your email post office Configuring ViPOP STOR MSNivasseccussecracui e senents T eats 13 PLECIA ES NA EE ER AA I E PTA A A E E E E E E E E eT enTwe 13 Installing Exchange Server amp VPOP3 on the same Computer e es ssssssesressessesressesseoseoseoseeseeseessessessesses 113 Installing Exchange Server amp VPOP3 on different computers ccsesssesessstetsesesesesescsescseseseeeseseeeeeeeees 114 Importing Exporting External Address Book cscssssssssssssssssesesssssssssssssesesssesssesescsesesesssesessseseceeesenenesenes 114 Schedule Property Page 115 COn oC pl 210 0 eana E E 116 SCHEDULE SDA
167. ess of the VPOP3 server when you set up your internal TCP IP network Details for a few common client software packages are given here Microsoft Internet Mail 121 Eudora 127 Pegasus Mail 136 Configuring Outlook Windows Messaging Exchange Client 138 Outlook Express 140 LDAP with Microsoft Outlook 98 or Outlook Express 149 Netscape Messenger 4 152 LDAP with Calypso 158 Lots of other email client software can be used In fact any email client software which works with Internet POP3 and SMTP email can be used The general rules for configuring your email client software are to 1 Tell the software that it is to connect using your LAN not dial up 2 Tell the software the IP address of VPOP3 as the POP3 and SMTP servers 3 Tell the software your local VPOP3 user account name and password as the POP3 account Microsoft Internet Mail Please Note Microsoft Internet Mail is NOT the same as Windows Messaging or Microsoft Exchange they are described here Microsoft Internet Mail is a free program that is distributed along with Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 All options not mentioned below can be set as you desire Choose Mail Options from the menu choose the Server tab v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 121 VPOP3 Your email post office Server Tab Send l Read Server Fonts Spelling Signature Connection Name Paul Smith Organization Paul Smith Computer Services Email
168. et all email for MD and forward any important messages onto MD for the Managing Directory to handle whilst handling any routine messages himself without bothering MD Note If you just want straightforward forwarding to another address look at the Email forwarding and User Forwarding sections What are Valid Domains VPOP3 checks all email domains to see if they match the domains which VPOP3 should know about the rules depend on how the email message is received e Messages Downloaded using POP3 If a message is downloaded by VPOP3 from an ISP using the POP3 mail protocol then VPOP3 will check to see if the email domain is valid by comparing it to the Accepted Domains setting for the current In Mail configuration So if the Accepted Domains entry is acme com email sent to j carston acme com has a valid domain but email sent to j carston widgets com does not have a valid domain e Local Messages If a message is sent to VPOP3 locally VPOP3 will check to see if the email domain is valid by comparing it to the Local Domains setting on the Local Mail page e Messages received from the ISP using SMTP These are checked using the same rules as for local email messages above v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 57 VPOP3 Your email post office What does VPOP3 do with Invalid Domains e If the message is downloaded using POP3 the message is sent to the user specified on the Admin page e If the message
169. et you choose from various different protection methods Note that using any of these methods incoming SMTP for local users should still get through These methods only prevent incoming SMTP for external addresses User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Check from LAN This tells VPOP3 to only allow messages for external addresses from other computers on the LAN not from computers connecting over a RAS connection Check FROM address This tells VPOP3 to look at the From address of the message If it is from a local user VPOP3 will accept the message otherwise it will refuse the message Check Client IP address This tells VPOP3 to look at the IP address of the PC sending the message It uses the SMTPALLOWED DAT file If the client IP address is allowed from that file VPOP3 will allow it to send external messages otherwise it can only send messages to local users Refuse SMTP Connections From By default VPOP3 refuses SMTP connections from lt anything gt mail demon net This is because we recommend using the POP3 service offered by Demon Internet instead of their SMTP service because there is much more functionality that way If you really want to use Demon Internet s SMTP service clear this box and make sure that you do not connect to Demon s POP3 server as well You can only specify a single name here VPOP3 checks the HELO SMTP command sent by the SMTP client and checks the this str
170. ey are on holiday Forwarding the messages for someone who has left the company to someone else within the company There is a pseudo mapping called REMOTE to signify remote users Import Mappings You can import a CSV file into VPOP3 s Mappings This will delete any existing mappings first before importing the file so be sure that you want to do this The imported file must be a valid CSV Comma Separated Variables file with two fields per line the first is the external email address and the second is the VPOP3 mailbox name Export Mappings You can export the VPOP3 mappings into a CSV file The exported file will be a CSV Comma Separated Variables file with two fields per line the first is the external email address and the second is the VPOP3 mailbox name This file will be readable by most Spreadsheet and database programs Assistants An assistant is a second email address which receives copies of messages for local users The assistant can be another local user or an external email address Note you cannot specify a Mapping or List as an assistant Setting the Assistant You set the assistant on the User gt Add Edit window You can either select a local mailbox to receive copies of messages or type in an external email address Page 56 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office The Assistant facility is mainly intended for sending mail to a user s assistant but it can als
171. f you will be re importing the user list at a later stage The Verbose Export option tells VPOP3 to write more information to the CSV file The Export Passwords option tells VPOP3 to write the passwords to the CSV file note the passwords are stored in a mangled form so they cannot easily be read but they can be re imported into VPOP3 if necessary Exported User Database CSV Format When the User Database is exported it is stored as a CSV Comma Separated Variables file This is a file which can be imported into a spreadsheet or database The file is a text file with a single line per user Each line can consist of various fields each describing one of the characteristics of a user There are four possible formats when VPOP3 exports the user database e Least Information Not Verbose No Passwords e Passwords Not Verbose Passwords e Verbose Verbose No Passwords e Full Verbose Passwords CSV Format Least Information This format is used if you choose Not Verbose and No Passwords There are two columns 1 User Id 2 Administrator flag 1 admin 0 not admin e g User Id Admin paul 1 fiona 0 echo test O Note the first line containing column titles is optional CSV Format Passwords 9 66 This format is used if you choose Not Verbose Passwords There are three columns 1 User Id 2 Administrator flag 1 admin 0 not admi
172. fining the RAS connection If you choose to define a RAS connection method in VPOP3 you need to enter information in the following fields RAS Connection This will contain a list of all the RAS connections which are defined on your computer Choose the one you wish to use for this Connection method User Name This is the user name you use for connecting using the RAS connection you have chosen Page 26 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Password This is the password you use for connecting using the RAS connection you have chosen Retries This defines the number of times you want VPOP3 to try and establish a RAS connection Interval This lets you specify the time in minutes before VPOP3 will retry a connection This is useful if VPOP3 will be sharing a modem with some other software e g a fax server Timeout This is the number of minutes that VPOP3 will wait before cancelling a RAS connection which isn t connecting properly Note this does not allow VPOP3 to drop an idle RAS connection once it has been established properly To do that you will need to use the Socket Timeout entries on the Misc Property Page Alternative dial up Connections and AutoConnect The RAS Connections which can also be used if established list contains a list of all the RAS Dial up Networking connections which are configured on your computer You should select any entries on this list which relate to alternate connectio
173. for e Distributed Sites Using REMOTE Mappings 179 This method is very simple to set up but has the disadvantage that each office will download all messages and simply discard all unwanted messages after downloading This problem can be reduced by using Download Rules to filter which messages are downloaded Another disadvantage is that each site must be running VPOP3 and it isn t recommended that it is used if any sites are single users at home or on laptop computers because those users could access anyone s email e Distributed Sites Using Subsidiary Mail Accounts 180 This method is a bit more complex to set up and requires each site to have its own POP3 email account There is an advantage in that each site except the head office only gets its own email Also individual remote users are easily catered for and single user sites don t need to run VPOP3 e Distributed Sites Using LAN Forwarding 181 If you have a company WAN Wide Area Network this is probably the best option to go for It uses LAN forwarding to get quick delivery of messages between sites Distributed Sites using Hierarchical Servers Supporting multiple sites using Hierarchical Servers is best used when all sites can be connected using a Windows NT RAS dial in service to one of the other offices For instance often the head office will have a RAS server and the other offices can dial into that server to collect send mail v 1 3 0 May
174. from VPOP3 NOT your ISP whether that is deleted depends upon your VPOP3 configuration Any fields not mentioned can be set as you see fit v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 137 VPOP3 Your email post office Configuring Outlook Windows Messaging Exchange Client All three of these packages use MAPI services for mail so the configuration is essentially the same in all cases Choose Tools Services from the menu If you have not already added it add a new Internet Mail service Enter the Properties of this service Internet Mail General Connection Internet Mail Personal Information Full name Faul Smith E mail address paul pscs co uk Mailbox Information Internet Mail server li 932 168 57 1 Account name paul Password E Message Format Advanced Options Cancel Apply Help Full Name Enter your full name E mail address Enter your full email address Internet Mail Server Enter the IP address of the VPOP3 server or 127 0 0 1 if you are not on a LAN Account name Enter the Username defined in VPOP3 for the mailbox you want to access Password Enter the Password defined in VPOP3 for the mailbox you want to access Page 138 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Press the Advanced Options button Advanced Options Forward all outbound mail to the following mail server Leave this field blank Press OK Choose
175. guration or it can be a network connection Once you have chosen your VPOP3 server proceed to the Server Configuration section and set it Server Configuration This applies equally to where the VPOP3 is a machine on a network or a standalone To install VPOP3 run the SETUP EXE program You will be prompted for the location to store the VPOP3 files This directory MUST have long file name support so be careful if putting it on a Novell server This directory should NOT be visible to all users on the network You will also be prompted for the Startup Option There are four options some of which will be disabled depending on which Operating System you are running None In this case VPOP3 will not be run at startup unless you explicitly run it Startup Group In this case VPOP3 will be placed in the Windows Startup eroup It will be run as soon as someone logs in It will NOT be running until someone logs in to Windows Windows 95 Service This option in only available if running from Windows 95 In this case VPOP3 will start up as soon as Windows 95 starts and users will be able to send and receive local mail even when no one is logged in Due to limitations within Windows 95 VPOP3 is not able to connect to the Internet using Dial up networking unless someone is logged in Windows NT Service Page 20 This option is only available if running from Windows NT In this case VPOP3 will start up as soon as Win
176. he External Address Book Import Export file format is that the first line is the header line containing the LDAP token names for the data in each column The following column names are used cn Common Name or display name mail Email address Title Job Title givenname First name sn Surname Last name physicaldeliveryofficename Business office name number department Business department URL Business web URL postaladdress Business post address l letter L Business Location city st Business State region postalcode Business Postcode Zip code C Business Country CO Business Company Name telephonenumber Business Telephone number User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office officefax Business Fax number officepager Business Pager number mobile Mobile telephone number homepostaladdress Home post address homephone Home telephone number facsimiletelephonenumber Home Fax number All the data from each line in the CSV file will be imported as a new External address book entry with the data from the each column being entered in the appropriate place in the address book The simplest way to work out how CSV files work is to create a few entries in the address book manually Export it to a CSV file which you can load into your spreadsheet or database program for editing External LDAP Address Book Entry When you create or edit an External Address Book entry you will be shown a
177. he first 100 bytes there will be one or more lines containing RCPT TO lt recipient gt These lists all the recipients of the message There may also be a line starting DSNINFO this contains Delivery Status Notification information see RFC 1891 Next there will be a line saying DATA This marks the end of the SMTP envelope data and the start of the message itself Following that is the message text Notes 1 In the message text there is no terminating stored in the file that the OutMail processor sees or creates VPOP3 adds that character when necessary 2 period characters contained in the message text do not need padding with an extra period to ensure that the end of message is not incorrectly detected VPOP3 will do this automatically v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 207 VPOP3 Your email post office Mailer Daemon Control Messages It is possible to set or query certain user features by sending email messages to the user Mailer Daemon Currently there are the following facilities Set Finger Plan Query Finger Plan Set Assistant Query Assistant Set Forwarding Query Forwarding Enable InMail methods Disable InMail methods Query Assistant using Mailer Daemon To query your Assistant by email send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Query Assistant The message text should contain the lines USERNAME lt username gt PASSWORD lt password gt Yo
178. he first four fields of the POP3 Server section on the In Mail Page describe how VPOP3 is to connect to your ISP s POP3 mail server VPOP3 Settings i ES Out Mail Schedule l Local Mail l Misc Local Servers Admin Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists In Mail Connection wt 1 CI ce Remove f POPS Incoming C SMTP Incoming C YPOPS File fer PUPS Server Incoming Mail Address mailcincouk Pit j0 User ID pscs Password If Do not download messages gt 100 Kb Routing if Leave messages on server E days Accepted Domains Jpses co uk Use Connections W Enable E3 ClaranlET i oe a Ac E e The Address field contains the name of the POP3 mail server you should ask your Internet Provider for this if it is not listed in Common ISP Settings on page 110 e The Port field is the TCP IP port which your ISP s POP3 mail server uses Normally this is 110 so just leave it as the default value e The User ID field contains the name that you should use to connect to your ISP s POP3 mail server You will need to ask your Internet Provider for this if you don t already know it Page 30 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office The Password field contains the password you need to use to connect to your ISP s POP3 mails server You will need to ask your Internet Provider for this if you don t already know it The
179. hey can NOT be lists or mappings Page 206 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office OutMail Processors OutMail processors process outgoing mail messages before they are placed in the OutQueue OutMail processors can optionally be run on internal email as well as Internet email OutMail processors require you to be an experienced programmer so they are not intended for most users If you want to write an OutMail processor then you will need to be willing to read write binary amp text files and you should also understand the SMTP protocol described in RFC 821 How OutMail Processors work When VPOP3 calls the OutMail processor it passes two command line parameters 1 The In Filename this is the name of the file containing the initial data to be sent 2 The Out filename this is the name of the file which will contain the final data to be sent The OutMail processor should read the In file and optionally create the Out file if it doesn t create an Out file VPOP3 will just discard the message It should NOT delete the In file VPOP3 will do that The In Out File Format Both the In and Out files are in an internal VPOP3 file format This is described below 1 The first 100 bytes are a zero padded string containing the MAIL FROM name which will be used in the outgoing message 2 Following that everything is in text format lines MUST end with a CR LF pair Immediately following t
180. ho can initiate connections on the Misc Property Page with the Allow Connections from Menu option If this option is enabled then anyone with access to the VPOP3 server can choose Connect Now from the VPOP3 icon If this option is disabled only administrators can initiate connections by going to the Connection Property Page and pressing the Connect Now button If you want anyone with access to the VPOP3 server to have access to the property pages see the Auto Logon facility v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 165 VPOP3 Your email post office Email Forwarding A common requirement is to be able to forward messages received by VPOP3 to another email address There are several ways of doing this with VPOP3 The first two methods require a user to be defined so they use up some of your allowed user allocation They are useful if the person is sometimes in the office but occasionally wants their email to be forwarded elsewhere The third method doesn t require a user to be defined but is a bit more complex 1 Using Assistants To do this simply create a user as normal and then enter the remote email address in the Assistant box See the notes about Assistants before using this method 2 Using User Forwarding To do this simply create a user as normal and then enter the remote email address in the Forward To box 3 Using Distribution Lists Page 166 To do this create a Distribution List Give the list the name
181. ich must be spare when downloading messages from the ISP POP3 server POP3DiskSpaceSpare2 DWORD default 15 number of extra MB which must be spare if VPOP3 isn t querying the message sizes before downloading SMTPDiskSpaceSpace DWORD default 10 number of MB which must be spare before sending messages SMTPDiskSpaceSpare2 DWORD default 1 number of MB which must be spare during sending messages CreateProperDeliveryReports DWORD 1 default create proper format DSN error success reports as defined in RFC 1894 0 create messages in text plain format for non conforming email clients DontRunHouseKeeper DWORD 0 default Run background house keeper task constantly to do things like SMTP forwarding external autoresponders mailer_daemon processing VPOP3 File Transfer etc 1 don t do the background task constantly this will allow things which don t like the disk being periodically read eg scandisk to work but may stop VPOP3 s background processing from working properly Page 220 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Alternate Telephone Numbers You can tell VPOP3 to dial using alternate telephone numbers by using RegEdit and finding HKEY_ LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE PaulSmith VPOP3 RAS You may want to find a subkey of this key with the name Conn1 Conn2 etc check the Name value to see if it is the name of the Connection which you want to change Add a String value called AlternateNumb
182. ies of that user to match those in the import file If this option is not selected then VPOP3 will leave the properties of that user as they already are in the user database If you choose the Remove Users not present option if VPOP3 doesn t find an already existing user in the file being imported it will remove that file from the user database If you do not choose this option VPOP3 will keep all users which are already in the user database and just add or replace the users listed in the imported file Passwords Options The Passwords options tell VPOP3 how to create passwords for the users being added or replaced e From File tells VPOP3 to read the passwords from the file being imported If you choose the Encrypted option VPOP3 will decrypt the passwords using the same method that they were encrypted when exporting the user database This is useful if you want to re import a user list which you exported previously v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 201 VPOP3 Your email post office e Random tells VPOP3 to randomly create a password for each user being added or replaced e UserName tells VPOP3 to set the password to be the same as the username e Password tells VPOP3 to set the password for each user to be the text Password As well as updating the user database VPOP3 will create a file called USER TXT which contains a list of the users and passwords where appropriate which VPOP3 has added replaced or deleted
183. il domain such as sales mydomain com It can only be a new email domain if the Original Recipient also specifies an entire email domain Notes 1 You must shutdown and restart VPOP3 in order for changes to the SMTPFWD DAT file to take effect unless you use the Edit SMTPFWD DAT button on the Local Mail Property Page 2 VPOP3 forwards messages asynchronously It copies the messages into the HouseKeeper directory as files called FQxxxxxx DAT and processes them in the background v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 223 VPOP3 Your email post office Troubleshooting Miscellaneous Problems Connecting on each message send If VPOP3 appears to send messages to the ISP as soon as an outgoing message is sent to VPOP3 there are a few things to check e Does VPOP3 think that the outgoing message is Urgent e Is VPOP3 told to Connect Using LAN and is the If Outgoing Mail arrives whilst online send immediately option enabled on the Misc Property Page Because VPOP3 is connecting using a network connection it believes that it is always online so it will send the message immediately e Do you have a schedule set where VPOP3 will send outgoing mail very frequently Can t Remove Last In Mail Configuration VPOP3 needs at least one In Mail configuration in order to run If you want to remove this In Mail configuration create an alternative one first by choosing lt New gt from the Svr drop down lis
184. il to the ISP See also LAN Forwarding You choose which Connection you are defining Outgoing Mail Settings for in the Conn drop down list Methods of sending outgoing email There are three methodes 1 Via SMTP Relay This is usually the best way for sending outgoing mail if you are connected to an ISP via a dial up ISDN connection You specify the name of your ISP s SMTP server as a relay server All outgoing mail is sent to that server which then will send it to the target recipients User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 Page 46 VPOP3 Your email post office 2 SMIP Direct This is usually the best way if you are connected to the Internet using a faster connection There is a lot more data to be sent if you use this method so it is normally considerably slower than the previous method but some ISPs don t allow the use of their relay servers if you have a leased line connection 3 VPOP3 File XFer This is used when two VPOP3 servers need to communicate over a link which doesn t support TCP IP protocols like SMTP The Windows 95 dial in server doesn t support TCP IP so if you are using that as a dial in server you will probably need to use this method Outgoing Mail using an SMTP Relay In the SMTP Outgoing Mail Relay Servers section you can enter zero or more SMTP servers which can be accessed using this Connection if there is more than one server each one should be entered on its own line VPOP3 will go through
185. iles into the External Address Book Page 190 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office To use this facility simply copy the VCF file into the VPOP3 HouseKeeper directory VPOP3 will periodically check this directory and import any VCF files it finds there It will then delete the VCF file Note that VPOP3 will check the VCF file to see if any other entries with the same display name exist If so VPOP3 will replace the previous display name entry with the new one We intend to improve on the VCF file import support in future versions External Routing You can define a program which you want to use to tell VPOP3 which user s to send incoming message to You set this on the VPOP3 Extensions window This program will be run whenever a message is downloaded by VPOP3 using the POP3 mail protocol Uses for External Routers There are many different possible uses this facility could be used for A few examples are e Acompany wide auto responder For instance you may have a company wide absence database containing a list of users who are away from work The External Router program could check this database for each incoming message and send an appropriate message back to the sender as well as routing the incoming message to the correct mailbox This may be easier to manage than setting individual autoresponders for each person as necessary e You may want to be able to randomly assign support em
186. indows dial up session first Note that although you have two POP3 accounts you only need to use one dial up connection Most ISPs allow access to their POP3 mailboxes from any dial in connection Check Use with Simple Schedule 2 Go to the Users Page and define your local users Add your users for this example add user1 and user2 3 Go to the In Mail Page 1 Choose POP3 Incoming 2 In POP3 Server Address enter the name of your ISP s POPS server e g pop3 isp com 3 In POP3 User ID enter your mailbox account name e g userl_mycompany v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 37 VPOP3 Your email post office 4 In POP3 Password enter your mailbox account password this is usually the same as your dial up connection password 5 In Accepted Domains type the email address which this POP3 account handles e g userl mycompany com 6 In Use Connections select the connection you defined in 1 above 7 Press the Routing button to get to the Routing Page a Select Always Send To and choose useri from the drop down list b Press OK 8 Inthe Svr drop down list choose lt New gt This creates a second In Mail configuration which you can set up for user2 Follow steps 1 7 above for user2 instead of user1 9 Repeat 7 for each ISP mail server 4 Go to the Out Mail Page 1 Choose SMTP 2 Enter the name of your ISP s SMTP server in the SMTP Relay Servers box e g smtp isp com 5 Go to the Local Mail Page
187. ine the External Router to be c windows command com c vscan bat If you are running Windows NT use c winnt cmd exe instead of command com VSCAN BAT Listing Page 192 echo off REM Make sure the required directories exist if not exist vscan files md vscan files REM Change to the temporary files directory because unmime and uud REM unpack to the current directory cd vscan files REM Unpack all mime amp uuencoded attachments unmime routing dat gt nul uud routing dat gt nul REM Change back to the VPOP3 directory CG oa Nes REM Do Scan c program files mcafee virusscan scan vscan files all nobeep noexpire nomem gt nul REM McAfee VirusScan returns a result code of if there are no viruses or User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 Notes v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office REM a result code of 1 or more if there are viruses or errors if errorlevel 1 goto infected REM No infected files goto end REM Oops some files are infected infected REM Send redirection commands to VPOP3 echo To infected echo Subject Virus Infected end REM Cleanup deltree y vscan files gt nul This batch file will use standard VPOP3 message routing for all clean messages but will send any messages containing viruses to a user called Infected instead of the original recipient s and will change the message subject line to say Virus Infected Note that many commands hav
188. ing inside the HELO data string if it matches VPOP3 disconnects the SMTP client Fax Server Mailbox Don t get too excited Some Intranet enabled fax servers can collect mail from a POP3 mailbox This option tells VPOP3 to send mail to lt faxnumber gt localdomain to this mailbox VPOP3 treats any unrecognised address containing only 0 9 and as fax numbers So if you send mail to 44 1234 1234567 yourdomain VPOP3 will place this message into the fax mailbox In order for this to be used for sending faxes you need a suitable fax server such as FAXmaker for VPOP3 as well VPOP3 will also support the companyname name number yourdomain format which FAXmaker supports for specifying the recipient names Listserver Name Enter the name of the ListServer automated user Max Hops When VPOP3 receives a message by SMTP it will check the number of hops the number of times the message has been through a mail server If it is greated than the maximum number defined here VPOP3 will return the message as undelivered This helps VPOP3 to prevent infinite mail loops eg where VPOP3 is incorrectly set up and sends outgoing messages to itself v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 217 VPOP3 Your email post office Hold Obsolete UIDLs If you have enabled the Leave messages on server option each time VPOP3 connects to the ISP s POP3 server it gets a list of available messages and compares it
189. is received using SMTP either because it s a local message or it is sent from the ISP the message is sent into the OutQueue to be sent to the Internet on the next connection Monitoring Messages An administrator can choose to monitor messages sent to from some or all users Monitoring means that VPOP3 will send a copy of the messages to another mailbox with a slightly modified subject line to allow email client filters to be used to put them in a separate email folder On the Logging page you can tell VPOP3 how to monitor local incoming or outgoing messages by choosing one of e Monitor Incoming Messages this will allow you to monitor messages arriving from the Internet e Monitor Outbound Messages this will allow you to monitor messages sent out onto the Internet e Monitor Internal Messages this will allow you to monitor messages sent internally on your LAN For each of these options you can choose e All All users messages are monitored e None No users messages are monitored Selected Only users who have the Monitor option set on their User page settings will be monitored Note that if you choose Monitor Selected VPOP3 will only monitor messages if it can see that the From or To address matches a VPOP3 user ID at a domain specified in the Local Domains section of the Local Mail page Remote Users Page 58 Sometimes a normally local user address has to be at another location This is known as a Remot
190. jected or downloaded depending on size or header contents You can even tell VPOP3 to ask the intended recipient if he she really wants to get this message This is useful for Killing SPAM Supports Multiple POP3 Servers so you can consolidate your multiple ISP accounts and use one program and one email client to read all the messages Supports incoming mail using SMTP Supports Multiple outgoing SMTP Servers and you can limit the domains which each server can be used for if you wish AutoResponders to respond to incoming messages automatically either using standard text or an external program to generate the response Mailing List Server to run your own mailing lists in house for support and discussion groups VPOP3 can sense that a DUN session is active so it can use it to automatically collect mail unobtrusively whilst you re surfing the net Security only defined administrators can modify the VPOP3 settings Flexible scheduler to allow automatic connections at predefined intervals or times on specified days VPOP3 can be used to download messages from POP3 servers and forward them on to other SMTP servers e g gateways for other mail systems or other VPOPS3 servers Finger Server for remote querying of user information amp status Remote administration by telnet web page or email Remote changing of passwords by web page telnet or software like Eudora Support for Remote Users The VPOP3 server can be ma
191. k if any can run any operating system which supports TCP IP networking The VPOP3 machine should have a static IP address on your LAN it can have a dynamic address on the Internet The PC on which VPOP3 is running should be a 33MHz 486 or better with at least 8 MB of memory and approximately 20MB of disk space for working files What s New What s new in VPOP3 V1 3 0 Add Add User command in admin web browser Add date time to status log viewer in admin web browser Allow registry setting to turn off background processing for people who don t need it and want to be able to run things like ScanDisk on the same disk that VPOP3 is running Add downloaded message size in status log viewer Allow more use of wildcards in LAN forwarding Change SMTP Forwarding to LAN Forwarding to try to reduce confusion What s new in VPOP3 V1 2 10 v 1 3 0 May 1999 Allow setting Mailing list welcome unsubscribe signature from web browser administration Add Send Local Mail for unrecognised users to ISP option Allow configuration of HTTP admin server separately from Telnet admin server Allow configurable LAN Forwarding retry time Allow configurable REPLY TO field for listserver responses Add WHICH listserver command User Manual Page I VPOP3 Your email post office Allow moderators always to do a USERS command even if normal users can t Sort HTTP mail reader messages in reverse date time
192. l Proper ASS ence ceke etka helo e AO 29 USS COMMECHONS E EN OOE E 30 Configure a single POP3 mailbox with domain forwarding ssessssessssessssessesesseses 33 Dial up connection to the Internet e ssesssseseesesressesressesseeseessesseseesseoseoseoseeseessessessesseeseeseoseseeseoseeseoseesressee 33 Permanent or Proxy connection to the Internet ssessessessessessessesssessessessesseesseseessessessesseeseesessesseesessessess 34 Configure inward SMTP feed norinni nen n Ee EEEE A EEE E 35 Did up COMMECTION LO e EEE a E AA 35 CONNECTION throush a Proxy SCIV ER zerr este tect cnrcrereeeteim nae 36 Permanent connection CO the INCOME E siesscsesususesssxssususrseusseseususesessousensuseunsssnzeveurerdsvecweieseilavansoueenenennewes 36 Configure Multiple POP3 mailboxes ssssssssscssescesssssssesscessssseeesecsssessesesseseesseeeesees 37 Dial up connection EO CS MLETO Cusio EE ete ceseeevencocusceceesceresccecedcecexsvavernebetvesresle 37 Permanent or Proxy connection to the Internet ssesssessesssesseessesseessscsseessesseesseoseesseoseroseessroseesseoseoseess 38 Configure a single POP3 mailbox without forwarding essesesessesesesessesesessssesesesesse 39 Incoming Mailing List Messages onseneeeeeesesesesessssoresesesesesesesesesessosoresesesesesesesesessreresese 40 What happens to Mail for an Unrecognised User esssssscecscssssssscsssesescsescscseseseseseseseseseseceesseeeeeeeceneees 4 Local Mail
193. l Reply Address To box VPOP3 will change the user s email address in any Internet email messages referring to this person It will not affect local email messages You will normally want to use this facility if your users local email addresses are different from their Internet email addresses for instance if you are telling VPOP3 to share a single email address between many users 6 Ifyou want VPOP3 to monitor messages to from this user check the Monitor box You will also need to have set the monitoring options on the Logging page If you want to limit the size of outgoing messages from this user set the Max Outgoing Message Size option A value of 0 zero means that there is no size limit Note that there is never a limit for internal messages Edit LDAP Data If you go to the Edit User window and press the Edit LDAP Data button you are shown the window below which will let you view edit the LDAP attributes for this user Page 52 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Edit LDAP Data EAE Attribute Display Hame fred Mail Address frediipscs co uk Title hr First Mame Fred lnitials A Sumame Bloggs Office Marne ALT Department Accounts The attributes which can be entered are defined using the LDAP ATR file Note to try and make it easier to enter data the ENTER key will swap between the Attribute list and the Data field in this window AutoResponder Settings
194. l a service on any particular port It is quite easy to change the port which VPOP3 wants to use see the Local Servers page but it is quite difficult to change which port Exchange Server wants to use and impossible to change which server it wants to send outgoing mail to What we have found works is Edit the file lt winnt gt System32 drivers etc services Change the line which says smtp 25 tcp mail so that it says smtp 1025 tcp mail Then restart Windows NT This tells Exchange Server s Internet Mail Service IMS to install its SMTP service on port 1025 instead of port 25 When configuring IMS tell it to e Allow both inbound amp outbound mail v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page I 13 VPOP3 Your email post office e Route all outbound mail through a single host 127 0 0 1 or the IP address of the VPOP3 computer Then in the VPOP3 directory create a text file called SMTPFWD DAT and put a line in it yourdomain 127 0 0 1 1025 This tells VPOP3 to send all incoming mail for anyone yourdomain to the SMTP service on port 1025 on the local computer ie to Exchange Server You may also want to disable some of the other services in VPOP3 see the Local Servers page so that they don t conflict with the equivalent Exchange Server services Installing Exchange Server amp VWPOP3 on different computers When configuring IMS tell it to e Allow both inbound amp outbound mail e Route all outboun
195. l address again You can override this by using the lt OnlyOnce gt response definition tag Other options can be set within the autoresponse file itself see below Extending Simple Autoresponders If you have more complex requirements you can modify the way the AutoResponder behaves by inserting special control sequences into the autoresponse text e To tell the AutoResponder to respond differently depending on the incoming message subject look at Message Sections e If you want to change who the automatic response appears to come from whether the message is left in the recipient s mailbox or any other characteristic which affects the AutoResponder in general look at Response Definition Tags e If you want to insert external files or variable text into the automatic response look at Inline Expansion Tags Message Sections By using Auto Responder Message Sections you can respond to an incoming message using different text depending on the original message s Subject line Defining a Message Section A Message Section is headed by a line consisting of e Section lt subject text gt This section will be used if the originating subject line contains lt subject text gt e All This section will be used regardless of the subject line e Default This section will be used if no previous sections have matched If you want to begin a line with a real symbol prefix it with a V symbol Example The for
196. l up scripting tool Microsoft have a hotfix available but you have to ask them explicitly for it Microsoft expect to have a generally available fix available in Service Pack 4 SP4 but there is no planned release date yet See also MS Knowledge Base article Q123597 An alternative solution is to use the SWITCHL INF style of logon scripting instead of the SCP scripts See the NT resource kit for information v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 229 VPOP3 Your email post office Sounds VPOPS3 has the ability to play sounds when certain events occur To set these sounds go to Control Panel gt Sounds Sounds Properties Ei Sounds Events VPOPS Administrator Logor Connection Ended Connection Made New Mail Arrived Program Erd Program Startup ee M EE m Sound ce Preview None one jm Eoee ell Save Ag Delete In the Events list there will be an application called VPOP3 with events e Administrator Logon e Connection Ended e Connection Made e New Mail Arrived this indicates that mail has been downloaded from the Internet into someone s mailbox e Program End e Program Startup Choose the WAV file which you want to use from the Sound Name list or press the Browse button to find another WAV file Page 230 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Index 162 161 161 REMOTE Mapping 55 211 161 161 161 161 l
197. ld be a single line specifying the command to run when a message is received For instance User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office myprog exe to run myprog exe in the VPOP3 directory c 4dos 4dos com c respond btm to run the respond btm 4DOS batch file c perl perl exe respond pl to run the respond pl PERL script You should ensure that the program name is surrounded by quotes if there are any spaces in the path to the program eg c program files perl bin perl exe c program files vpop3 myresponse pl When the program is executed the current directory is the VPOP3 directory not the mailbox directory The program is passed a single parameter which specifies the full path to a control file This should never really be used because the data in that file is also available in Environment Variables which should be used instead The filename is only specified for backwards compatibility This means that the actual command to be run is something like c perl perl exe respond pl c program files vpop3 housekeeper ar125A2D dat e AutoResponder Environment Variables contain information which is useful to the autoresponder operation The program has its standard input amp output files redirected as below e The STDIN input file contains the incoming message text e The STDERR control file is written to to tell VPOP3 where to send the response amp other control i
198. le Connection defined then there will simply be a Connect Now and Hangup Now option If you have more than one Connection defined then the Connect Now option will have a sub menu with entries for each defined Connection as well as another two options All This will cause all Connections to be triggered All Primary This will cause only those Connections which are defined as Use with Simple Schedule to be Triggered Dialling from a Web Browser Page 120 If you connect to the http administration server on port 5107 of the PV running VPOP3 for example http 192 168 0 1 5107 one of the facilities available is Connect Now from the Status page For more information see Web Page Based Administration on page 212 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Configuring your Email Client Software Your Email client Software is the software you use for reading and composing email messages such as Eudora Microsoft Internet Mail etc This software should be configured to connect to VPOP3 rather than to your ISP s email server How you do this will depend upon your particular email client software e If you are running VPOP3 on the same machine as your email client software specify 127 0 0 1 as the IP address of both the SMTP and POPS servers e If you are running VPOP3 across a network specify the IP address of the VPOP3 server as the address of the SMTP and POP3 servers You defined the IP addr
199. led ROUTING DAT in the VPOP3 directory The external routing program should NOT modify this file any changes will NOT be reflected in the message which is actually sent to the local recipient see below if you want to modify the incoming message contents When the external router is run it is given no extra command line parameters and it is run with the current directory set to the directory where VPOP3 EXE is running If the external router wants to change the target recipient and or the subject line it can do so by sending text to the standard output STDOUT VPOP3 redirects STDOUT to a file called ROUTING CTL which it reads after the external router has finished The commands which the external router can write to STDOUT are To lt recipient gt This tells VPOP3 who to send the incoming message to This can be any address a local mailbox mapping list external address or address handled by LAN forwarding If no To command is present the built in VPOP3 routing will be used If To None is used the incoming message will be discarded Subject lt new subject gt This tells VPOP3 to change the Subject line of the incoming message If no Subject command is present the subject line of the incoming messagewill not be changed If any lines are sent to STDOUT which do not match any of these commands they will be ignored by VPOP3 External Router Environment Variables When an external router is run various environment
200. line in the imported file Margaret maggie isponline com Example Usage This facility is very useful if you have large numbers of forwarding addresses you need to maintain for instance if you re setting up Distributed Sites Using Subsidiary Mail Accounts In that case you would probably also want to use the Don t Import Forwarding To facility v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 97 VPOP3 Your email post office We ll look at the same example used in the Distributed Sites topic You have 4 users in two offices Sue and James in office 1 and Philip and Karen in office 2 We will say that office 1 is the main office Say that your main email account has a domain name of cybercamels co uk and your subsidiary email account has an address of cybercamels2 isp co uk Create a text file with the following lines Users at office 1 sue sue cybercamels co uk james Lames cybercamels co uk Users at office 2 philip cybercamels2 isp co uk karen cybercamels2 isp co uk In office 1 cybercamels co uk import the above file with Don t Import Forwarding To cybercamels co uk In office 2 cybercamels2 isp co uk import the same file with Don t Import Forwarding to cybercamels2 isp co uk This will only import the appropriate forwardings to users at other offices in the company If you get new users or users move around you can simply modify the above file and re import it at all sites to refresh the fo
201. ll VPOP3 not to look at the Received lines at all by disabling the Use Received Fields option v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 183 VPOP3 Your email post office Duplicate Messages In your ISP Mail Box When messages arrive for multiple people at your site your ISP may put multiple copies of the message into your mailbox at the ISP When VPOP3 downloads these messages it will send each copy to each person listed in the To or Ce fields of the message header This means that each person ends up with duplicated messages VPOP3 can try to eliminate this problem if you go to the In Mail Property Page press the Routing button and enable the Attempt To Remove Duplicate Messages option When this option is enabled VPOP3 looks at each message which it downloads in any particular connection and compares certain portions of the message header with every other message being downloaded If those parts of the header match exactly VPOP3 will only distribute a single copy of the message Because this could potentially lead to messages being lost VPOP3 tries to be very careful about this It compares these sections e From e Date e Subject e Message Id e The Recipient list If all the sections match VPOP3 will decide that the messages are identical Duplicate Messages Due To Some Other Reason If neither of the other reasons for duplicate messages help your duplicate messages must be caused by some other reason First of all check
202. load Rule Example Only Download One Person s Email This is an example Download Rules filter to only download a single person s email Notes v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 163 VPOP3 Your email post office 1 You shouldn t rely on this rule to prevent one person reading another person s email since it s not hard to change the rules Only use this rule to save online time 2 Don t simply change this rule to make it NOT download mail for one person that will make it not download mail which is addressed to that person even if it is also addressed to a person for whom you do want VPOP3 to download mail lt Download any email for Louise company com To louise company com Cc lLouise company com Apparently To lLouise company com Received for lt louise company com gt Example Download Rules A Junk Mail Filter This is an example Download Rules filter to prevent VPOP3 from downloading certain junk email Notes 1 The rules only filter out certain junk email not all junk email other messages can be filtered by expanding the rule as appropriate 2 The conditions below match junk email which we have received The filtered senders might not be totally junk email senders but Silently delete spam To Members aol com From inboxexpress com To user aol com From independent mcmail com To Friend public com To you yourdomain net To response yerbiz com To Dear Friend To Secret Worl
203. manually or using the Auto Connection feature You can connect manually either on the Connection property page or by using the right click menu on the taskbar icon Simple this is a simple way of defining periodic connections It is quite flexible but there are a few limitations hence the third mode Complex this lets you define a very flexible scheduling system you can define exactly which Mail Servers are connected to and when to the nearest minute Complex scheduling isn t that complicated especially since you can generate a starting template from a simple schedule Complex schedules is described here This section will just describe setting up a Simple Schedule which is often all you need for simple business and home use Choose the Schedule property page You should see a window box like this POP3 Settings EES Misc Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists LocalMall Admn Connection l In Mail Out Mail schedule Local Servers C Manual Connection Connect from the menu Simple Schedule Define simple connection times below C Comples Schedule Define a schedule in SCHEDULE DAT Simple Schedule Always connect every 130 Minutes lf gt 1 megs to be sent connect every 20 Minutes ma ma Days Times do qo Between M Tuesday MW Saturday f Prs and M Wednesday M Sunday W Thursday 23 E hrs _ weekdays __ Eve Day write Schedule DAT
204. mary Log option the daily log will also contain a list of all VPOP3 accounts where there are messages older than 1 day still left in the mailbox This can be used to give an idea of which people are not reading their email If the Generate HTML Format Messages option is enabled VPOP3 will generate the summary log message using a multipart MIME message containing plain text and an HTML message Both messages will have the same format but the HTML one will force a fixed spacing font as the log messages require this for proper formatting If the Keep Summary Messages option is enabled VPOP3 will copy all the SUMMARY LOG files which it creates into a directory called Summaries with filenames of YYYYMMDD LOG These log files are NOT the messages which are sent to the default user but are the logs from which those are generated v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 167 VPOP3 Your email post office Daily Summaries You can tell VPOP3 to generate daily log messages showing how many messages were sent and received by each user If you have told VPOP3 to generate these messages they will be sent to the Main Administrator You configure the Daily Summaries at the top of the Logging page e To enable the sending of daily summary logs enable Send Daily Summary Logs to Main Administrator e If you want the daily summary logs to contain a list of mailboxes which contain messages over 24 hours old enable Show Idle Accounts in Summary Log e
205. mat of a simple multi section autoresponder could be Thank you for your query an automated response follows Section Sales If you want to buy something send payment to Section VPOP3 VPOP3 is the best Email Server for Windows 95 amp NT Default I m sorry I don t recognise your message subject Try sending another message with the subject line of Sales or VPOP3 ALL If you want further help send an email to helpme v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 79 VPOP3 Your email post office This consists of 5 message sections 1 The first section without any section header an AII is assumed A Sales section A VPOP3 section A Default section to pick up any messages which haven t already been answered Se 5 A final All section to append to all response messages e An incoming message with a subject line of Tell me about VPOP3 would get a response of Thank you for your query an automated response follows VPOP3 is the best Email Server for Windows 95 amp NT If you want further help send an email to helpme e Anincoming message with a subject line of What about football would get a response of Thank you for your query an automated response follows I m sorry I don t recognise your message subject Try sending another message with the subject line of Sales or VPOP3 If you want further help send an email to helpme
206. me This is your name Email address This is your email address Reply to address Normally you will leave this blank as it is the same as your email address Organization This normally contains the name of your company but can be left blank Signature File This can be set as you desire Always attach Address Book Card to messages This can be set as you desire If it is enabled Netscape will attach a VCF file to all outbound messages v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 153 VPOP3 Your email post office Choose Messages from the list on the left Preferences F Appearance i Navigator 3 Mail amp Groupes pelde Groups Server Directoy i Composer H Offline H Advanced Bsn SE am F The options on this page can be set as you desire Page 154 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Choose Mail Server from the list on the left Preferences F Appearance i Navigator 3 Mail amp Groupes Identity Messages Groups Server pa Directory Fee 192 168 57 1 H Offline 132 168 57 1 Advanced Seb REV madee haranie GoMin oe Aare deetedmessages filth i feet Seen SUD POTS CHG PleG eahiheetiints jaa Mail server user name This is the VPOP3 account name for this user Outgoing mail SMTP server This is the IP address of the VPOP3 computer Incoming mail server This is the IP address of the VPOP3 computer Mail Server Type Set this to POP3
207. med to be the address to send the receipt to If the Only Send Delivery Receipts on Local Messages box is checked VPOP3 will only send delivery receipts in response to local messages requesting receipts Messages from across the Internet which requested receipts will have their requests ignored Note Whether or not you will receive a delivery receipt from a message you send across the Internet depends entirely on how the recipient s email system is configured There is nothing you can do at your site to force them to send receipts Transmission Receipts A Transmission Receipt is a message sent to the sender of a message when VPOP3 sends a message onto the Internet Some people like confirmation that a message has been sent This facility supplies that confirmation where requested The Generate Transmission Receipts On area should contain the field names to look for to decide whether to send a delivery receipt or not If the entry area is blank delivery receipts are never sent Note that the entry area only contains field names The field data is assumed to be the address to send the receipt to Defaults The Defaults button resets all the above fields to their initial values in case you accidentally delete them and forget what the original settings should be Home User version The Home User version of VPOP3 is like a 5 user version but it has the following restrictions e There are no External Autoresponders e There is no M
208. move TCP IP networking 2 Reboot the computer 3 Add TCP IP networking 4 Reboot the computer again Socket Error 10048 Specified Address Already in Use This error only normally occurs during VPOP3 startup It occurs if some other software is providing an SMTP or POP3 mail service on the same computer as VPOP3 is running on This could be a proxy like WinGate or WinProxy or another mail server program eg Exchange Server To prevent this problem you should either remove the conflicting service from the other software or change the Port which either that other software or VPOP3 uses for that mail service see the Local Servers page in VPOP3 for how to change the Port allocations in VPOP3 Related Topics Socket Error 10049 The specified address is not available from the local computer This error normally means that you have entered an invalid address on the Allow Connections On entries in the Local Servers page in VPOP3 The addresses entered here should be either lt Any gt or the IP address of a LAN adapter the PC running VPOP3 Socket Error 10054 The virtual circuit was reset by the remote end This error means that the connection between VPOP3 and a remote computer eg the ISP or another computer on your LAN was disconnected by something outside of VPOP3 This could mean that the remote computer itself decided to drop the connection abruptly or that the dial up connection failed unexpectedly or that the user
209. n 3 Mangled password e g User Id Admin Password paul 1 FGIPTVIAUB fiona 0 POQZSIMLSP v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 63 VPOP3 Your email post office echo 0 gt GEWSGMHPSDFG test 0 gt GQWWEAYNSGWZ Note the first line containing column titles is optional CSV Format Verbose 9 6 This format is used if you choose Verbose No Passwords There are seven columns 1 User Id 2 Administrator flag 1 admin 0 not admin 3 Internet reply to address 4 Assistant 5 Send Only to Assistant flag 1 send only to assistant 0 send to user mailbox 6 In Everyone List flag 1 in Everyone list 0 not in Everyone list 7 Is Internet Mail Sending Allowed flag 1 Internet mail allowed 0 not allowed e g User Id Admin Reply To Assistant Send Only To Assistant In Everyone List Is Internet Mail Allowed paul 1 0 1 1 fiona 0 0 1 1 echo 0 0 0 1 test 0 testlist ourdomain co uk 0 1 1 Note the first line containing column titles is optional CSV Format Full This format is used if you choose Verbose Passwords There are eight columns 1 User Id 2 Administrator flag 1 admin 0 not admin 3 Mangled Password 4 Internet reply to address 5 Assistant 6 Send Onl
210. n POP3 Server Address type pop3 demon co uk 3 In User Id type your Demon Internet hostname 4 In Password type your Demon Internet password 5 In Accepted Domains type lt hostname gt demon co uk 6 Press the Routing button a Choose According To Recipient b Enable Use Demon POP3 Extensions This will make the routing of downloaded messages as reliable as if they were received using SMTP Note you should not use the Demon SMTP mail service unless you have a very good reason VPOP3 has a lot more functionality if it downloads email using POP3 With the Demon POP3 extensions there is no advantage of using Demon s SMTP service over using their POP3 service If you really want to use the SMTP service do NOT set up a POP3 collection method and change the Refuse SMTP Connections setting on the Tuning window Go to the Out Mail page 1 Choose the SMTP method 2 In SMTP Relay Servers type post demon co uk Configuring VPOP3 for CIX Internet To configure VPOP3 for use with CIX Internet www cix co uk Go to the In Mail page 1 Choose the POP3 Incoming method Page 110 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office 2 In POP3 Server Address type tad Ccix co uk 3 In User Id type your CIX Internet hostname 4 In Password type your CIX Internet password 5 In Accepted Domains type lt hostname gt cix co uk lt hostname gt compulink co uk lt nickname gt cix co uk lt nickname gt
211. n collecting mail from an ISP using POP3 the client is the PC at the user s end and it is in total control of what messages it receives and which ones it doesn t The POP3 client can also typically view message headers without downloading the entire message see the message size before downloading it delete messages without downloading them or leave messages on the server after downloading them Because of these POP3 facilities VPOP3 can do a lot more to help you One of the normal problems which occurs if multiple email addresses are directed to a single POP3 mailbox is that the SMTP Envelope see above is lost when the message is placed in the mailbox This means that the explicit message routing information is lost and all that VPOP3 has to go on is the data in the message headers eg To Cc etc This can cause problems if you receive messages from mailing lists or which include Becs Some ISPs get around these problems by extending the POP3 protocol eg Demon Internet Services do this or adding special message header fields which VPOP3 can use if you tell it about them User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Command Line Parameters You can specify certain command line parameters to VPOP3 If you specify them when you initially run VPOP3 they will take effect straightaway You can also run VPOP3 and specify command line parameters even when a copy is already running In this case the command line par
212. n methods to your ISP If VPOP3 is going to use this Connection method and one of the selected RAS Connections is already active VPOP3 will use the active RAS connection instead of trying to establish a new connection You should ideally only specify those RAS connections which link to the same ISP NOT to other ISPs create other Connection methods to connect to other ISPs Press the Configure AutoConnect button to set up the AutoConnect parameters for this Connection AutoConnect is a VPOP3 feature where it can sense a RAS connection being set up by some other software or manually and use it for collecting and sending mail Other Settings The Connect Through SOCKS Server box lets you specify that you want this Connection method to be via the SOCKS server specified on the Misc Property Page The Use With Simple Schedule box lets you indicate that this should be used when you choose Connect All Primary while dialling from the VPOP3 menu or when a simple schedule action is triggered v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 27 VPOP3 Your email post office Configure AutoConnect VPOP3 has a feature where it can sense a RAS session being set up by some other software or manually and use it if possible for collecting and sending mail This feature is called Auto Connection and is configured by pressing the Configure Autoconnect button on the Connection Property Page You will get a window like this AutoConnect ki AutoC
213. nd sets up VPOP3 accordingly Please use the context help for each entry field to see more information click on the in the top right of the window and then on an entry field User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 Con VPOP3 Your email post office nections In Mail and Out Mail One of the frequent causes of confusion with VPOP3 is the relationship between Connections In Mail and Out Mail This confusion is because the VPOP3 scheme isn t as limiting as normal email software It allows great flexibility for when you have several Internet provider accounts In basic terms Note e A Connection is a method VPOP3 uses to connect to the Internet e An In Mail configuration is a method VPOP3 uses to collect incoming email These can be linked to one or more Connections e An Out Mail configuration is a method VPOP3 uses to send outgoing mail For each Connection there is a corresponding Out Mail configuration This is because most ISPs are now implementing anti relay filters which prevent you sending outgoing mail through them unless you have dialed into their modems Whenever VPOP3 connects to a Connection it will process the associated Out Mail configuration and all In Mail configurations which are linked to this Connection before disconnecting Example Let us say that you have two Internet provider accounts e You will typically tell VPOP3 about these two accounts by creating two Connection entries one for each ISP
214. nding mail If this is necessary then you will need to create install a Post Connect Extension on the Misc page This can connect to the ISP s server to send the command Unfortunately ISPs use many different methods so this facility cannot really be built into VPOP3 If you have a permanent connection to your ISP you need do nothing special to VPOP3 to enable this facility v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 31 VPOP3 Your email post office If you have a dial up connection to your ISP and you want to use VPOP3 s connection or scheduling facilities you go to the In Mail Property Page and choose the SMTP Incoming Option to get the following window POP3 Settings EES Misc Headers Logging l Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists Local Mail l Admin Connection In Mall Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Svr 4 SMTP Mail SMTP Mai Remove POPS Incoming SMTP Incoming YPOPS File fer SMTP Incoming Mail Walt for up to g seconds for an incoming connection M Use ETAN for domain pscs co uk Use Connections E1 CIP O2 Demon O 3 ClaraNeT W Enable In the SMTP Incoming Mail section you need to enter a time which VPOP3 should wait for an incoming SMTP connection over the dial up connection This is necessary because usually the ISP s mail servers takes a period of time to start sending mail so VPOP3 needs to wait for this time before hanging up VPOP3 cannot
215. ndow Extensions VPOP3 extensions are external programs which are run when certain events occur You can define VPOP3 extension programs by going to the Misc page and pressing the Define VPOP3 Extensions button v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 185 VPOP3 Your email post office POPS Extensions Timeout E sternal Router io com ic Aivdevelsy a0 uth ail Processor fao lM Run Outhiail Processor for Local Mail Post Connect Command f 0 Fre Disconnect Command f U Coresi Heo _ There are three possible extensions External Router This is a program which is used to programmatically route incoming messages from the Internet OutMail Processor This is a program which is executed for each outgoing message which is sent Run OutMail Processor for Local Mail If this is enabled the OutMail Processor will be executed for local messages as well as Internet messages Post Connect Command This is a program which is executed just after VPOP3 has connected to an ISP Pre Disconnect Command This is a program which is executed just before VPOP3 has disconnected from an ISP The VPOP3 extensions are defined by entering the program to run and any parameters to use in the VPOP3 Extensions window If the extension is an executable program EXE just enter the full path to the program e g c myprogs myextension exe If the extension is a batch file BAT enter COMMAND COM Windows 95 or
216. next settings tell VPOP3 how to handle the mail which it retrieves from the ISP mail server The Do not download messages gt field tells VPOP3 not to download messages over a certain size If you are also specifying that VPOP3 should leave messages on the server see below VPOP3 will add an automatic Download Rule which will cause it to ask the intended recipient if they want to download the large message If you are not leaving messages on the server VPOP3 cannot do this it will simply leave the message on the server to allow you to remove or download it manually The Leave messages on server field tells VPOP3 not to delete downloaded messages straight away but to leave them on the ISP mail server for a certain number of days Note that this isn t guaranteed to work because some ISPs delete mail as soon as it has been read anyway or they may impose a maximum time limit that mail can stay on their servers Also note that for this to work the ISP s POP3 mail server must support either the UIDL command or the TOP command Most do but unfortunately some don t If your ISP doesn t support either of these commands you will receive an appropriate error message from VPOP3 when you try to connect The Routing button will let you specify how VPOP3 will route messages that are downloaded from this ISP mail server See Advanced Routing The Accepted Domains field is very important This field tells VPOP3 which mail
217. nformation e The STDOUT output file is written to to tell VPOP3 what the response message should be How the AutoResponse Mechanism Works When a message is received that must be processed by an External files in the HouseKeeper directory If it finds one it runs the relevant External AutoResponder program to process it The STDIN file is redirected to the original message text and the STDOUT and STDERR files are redirected to files called AUTORESPONSE TXT and AUTORESPONSE CTL respectively in the main directory The relevant Environment Variables are initialised and the AutoResponder program is run in the background VPOP3 allows the AutoResponder up to 60 seconds to complete If it hasn t completed after that time VPOP3 kills the AutoResponder and sends an error message to the Default User When the AutoResponder completes successfully VPOP3 looks at the contents of the AUTORESPONSE CTL file to see how the response should be processed It then sends the contents of the AUTORESPONSE TXT file to the relevant addresses v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 85 VPOP3 Your email post office AutoResponder Environment Variables The External AutoResponder has its environment modified so that the following variables are set REPLY TO This is the Reply To address of the incoming message or the From address if there is no Reply To address ORIGINATOR This is the From address of the incoming message MAILBOX This is the name of
218. ng list Received This removes the Received trace fields from mailing list messages This is simply because those header fields generally aren t much use and take up space ListServer operation The ListServer is the automated controller for your Mailing Lists You talk to it by sending email to ListServer yourdomain com You can change the name of ListServer in the Tuning window It has a similar role to listserv and major domo that you may have seen with other mailing lists However it doesn t quite conform to their standards they are quite complex so we didn t call it one of those names in case it caused confusion ListServer interprets any messages sent to it and processes any commands that it recognises You place these commands into the body or Subject of the message sent to ListServer Generally available ListServer commands You normally send these commands to the ListServer user in the body of an email message The Subscribe and Unsubscribe commands can also be sent in the Subject of an email message if they are sent in the subject the message body is ignored This responds with a simple description of the commands to use To customise the help message create a text file called Is_help txt in the VPOP3 directory Quit or Stop This tells ListServer to stop processing the message now This is useful if you have a signature appended to your message and it is difficult to stop it being sent
219. ng messages are for the local system or need to be relayed back out again Use Connections The Use Connections section allows you to tell VPOP3 which Connections VPOP3 can use to connect to this mail server If any of the selected Connections are started by VPOP3 this Incoming Mail configuration will be used If a Connection which is not selected is started by VPOP3 this Incoming Mail configuration will NOT be used Enable The Enable button lets you disable or enable this Incoming Mail Configuration simply Configure a single POP3 mailbox with domain forwarding This topic gives step by step instructions for configuring VPOP3 to work with an email account where email to lt anyone gt mydomain com or lt anyone gt subdomain isp com is placed in a single ISP POP3 mailbox For the sake of this example we will assume that e Your email domain is mycompany com so that you get email to lt anyone gt mycompany com e The ISP s POP3 mail server is pop3 isp com and the SMTP mail server is smtp isp com Dial up connection to the Internet 1 Go to the Connection Page 1 Choose Use RAS for Connection 2 Enter the details for your dial up connection in the RAS Details section Note you should have configured and tested a Windows dial up session first 3 Check Use with Simple Schedule 2 Go to the In Mail Page 1 Choose POP3 Incoming 2 In POP3 Server Address enter the name of your ISP s POP3 server e g pop3 is
220. ngle POP3 mailbox may contain messages for fred jim bert etc VPOP3 will separate out these messages working from certain rules which you can specify and then presents several separate POP3 mailboxes one for each user These POP3 mailboxes can then be accessed from standard POP3 aware EMail software such as Pegasus Mail Windows Messaging or Outlook Internet Mail addon Microsoft Internet Mail Eudora etc VPOP3 also stores and forwards outgoing messages to your ISP s SMTP mail server VPOP3 has many other features which make it useful both for LAN installations and for Standalone PCs v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 9 VPOP3 Your email post office VPOP3 s many other features Make it useful both for LAN installations and for Standalone PCs Page 10 Easy to use and configure Routes mail from a single Internet Provider POP3 mailbox to multiple virtual POP3 mailboxes Allows mapping aliasing from several email addresses to a single virtual mailbox or from a single email address to multiple virtual mailboxes Routes mail to the same email domain locally without needing to access your Internet Provider thus allowing use it as an Intranet email server You can set up user assistants who can be internal or external email addresses Mail for specified users will be forwarded on to those users as well as or instead of the normal user Download Rules allow you to specify mail to be re
221. nsions to define programs which VPOP3 will run when certain events occur Page 204 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Immediate Sending of Outgoing Email The If Outgoing Mail arrives whilst online send immediately option means that if VPOP3 detects that it is online when an outgoing message arrives VPOP3 will restart the message sending cycle If this option is disabled the message will wait in the outqueue until the next VPOP3 connection VPOP3 detects that it is online if any connection 1 Uses a LAN connect note VPOP3 doesn t know if it s a true LAN connection or a connection via a LAN proxy or router 2 Has AutoConnect enabled and the one of the available RAS connections is currently active 3 Is currently downloading messages SOCKS Firewall Settings The SOCKS V4 Firewall settings allow you to tell VPOP3 to communicate with ISPs via a SOCKS V4 0 or V5 0 firewall Enter the IP address of your SOCKS firewall in the SOCKS Server Address field Enter the TCP IP port number in SOCKS Server Port field normally this is 1080 Enter any user id required by your SOCKS firewall in the SOCKS Server User Name field this is left blank if your SOCKS firewall does not require authentication Contact your network administrator if you know you have a SOCKS firewall but do not know the necessary settings You define whether a particular connection method uses the SOCKS firewall on the Connection
222. o Favorites Help S 2 2 a a E Back Bamsan Stop Refresh Home Search Favontes History Channels Address E Http 192 168 57 1 5108 password html Links Change VPOP3 Password for t paul Old Password fo New Password fo Retype New Password FO Change Password ran CO 4 po 4 2 Internet zone Enter your old and new passwords where specified and press the Change Password button hd A v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 71 VPOP3 Your email post office Web Browser User Settings Log on to the VPOP3 user web server for example http 192 168 0 1 5108 and choose Settings E User Settings Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt View Go Favorites Help E o 9 a a ag 2 ea amp Back Eonmsand Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Channels Fullscreen Mail Address E http 771 92 166 57 7 57108 settings html Change Settings for paul Assistant fiona Send Only To Assistant Forwarding Address pscs hotmail com Use Forwarding Finger Plan To give the world low cost Internet server software Apply settings p Change Password Back to Main Index z g z z Zz Internet zone ve You can set your Assistant and Forwarding address here as well as your Finger Plan Password Server It is possible for a user to change their Mailbox password remotely If you are using email client software such as Eudora this functionality is built into th
223. o be used as a method of set a forwarding address i e all mail to this mailbox gets sent to the Assistant address as well If you set a local Assistant on a mailbox which has existing email you are given the option of copying all mail on the mailbox to the new Assistant This option is only available when setting the assistant through the Property pages not when setting it by email or through the Admin Server Assistant Special Features The Assistant facility has several special features intended to make it useful as a way of sending mail to a person s assistant Let s say that the Managing Directory of a company has an email address MD and her Personal Assistant PA has an email address PA you could set the VPOP3 ASSISTANT for MD to be PA Now if someone sends an email to MD company PA will receive a copy of that email as well as MD However if PA sends an email message to MD PA will NOT receive a copy of that email message VPOP3 sees that the message is from the user s assistant so does not process the Assistant setting Also if the MD is very busy and normally doesn t have time to respond to all the junk email she receives you could set the option SEND ONLY TO ASSISTANT This means that email sent to MD company only gets sent to PA and MD doesn t get a copy However in this case if PA sends an email message to MD MD DOES get the message and PA doesn t get a copy This can be useful because PA can v
224. o note that if you have Local Routing turned off on the Local Mail Property Page you will need Internet Access for all your lists as all local messages will be treated by VPOP3 as if they are remote messages Configuring Mailing Lists If you have defined a Mailing List you can press the Mailing List Properties button to define how the mailing list works Mailing Lists Page 92 A Mailing List is a discussion group using email If you send a message to a mailing list all the members of that mailing list will receive a copy of your message Any replies that a member makes will go to the entire mailing list not only to you This allows all members of the mailing list to easily keep track of discussions and to contribute as they are able and see fit VPOP3 has a mailing list server which can be used for running your own mailing lists User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Creating a VPOP3 Mailing List To create a Mailing List in VPOP3 1 Open the VPOP3 properties 2 Go to the Lists page 3 Press the Add button to create a new list a Inthe List Name field type the name of your mailing list b For the List Type choose Mailing List C Enable Allow Internet Access to List if you want people on the Internet to be able to participate in the list d If you want to add any initial list members enter them now you can add more later or you can allow people to add themselves to the list 4
225. omatically using a BCC recipients of the message won t see the email addresses of the other members of that list Lists Property Page The Lists Property Page lets you define and manage User Lists POP3 Settings Ei ES Misc Headers Logging l Diagnostics Info Connection In Mail Dut Mall Schedule Local Servers Users Mappings Lists Local Mail l Admin Admin Br Admins Zg Everyone evernone malmod a Z No one Normal Fl test Fm test E i testmod EE best mod PS A Close Iv Mailing Lists y Distribution Lists M Groups I Forwarding Help Eeli Hemaore impart Forwarding Page 90 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Adding Lists VPOP3 allows an unlimited number of Distribution Lists and Mailing Lists regardless of your licence size except for the Home User version To add a list press the Add List button You will then be shown an Add List Window List Nesting Lists can be included within other lists but there is a nesting limit of 10 levels deep Attempts to nest lists deeper than this will result in the more deeply nested lists not being expanded VPOP3 handles list recursion safely so don t worry if this happens Built in Groups There are a three built in Groups Everyone This contains a reference to most defined local Users On the Add Edit User window you can define whether a user is in this list or n
226. onnect i a feature which allows YPOPS to detect an established RAS connection and automatically connect to your ISF using that without human intervention M Auto Connect when connected to a valid RAS connection T Auto Connect Once per AAS session Auto Connect Period 5 min OF Cancel AutoConnection is enabled if you check the Auto Connect when Connected to RASconnection s box When it is enabled VPOP3 will periodically check the connections selected in the list of RAS Connections which can also be used if established on the Connections Property Page to see if they are active If so VPOP3 will connect to the appropriate mail servers automatically There are two further settings for Auto Connection 1 Auto Connect once per RAS session This means that VPOP3 will only connect to the Mail Server once when it first senses that a RAS session has been established It will then not connect again until the RASsession has been dropped and re established 2 Auto Connect Period This specifies the number of minutes between the times when VPOP3 collects mail using the Auto Connection feature You cannot set this if the Auto Connect Once option is chosen NOTE The use of Auto Connection can lead to the automatic timeout disconnection feature of RAS or your modem not working and therefore if you leave an Internet connection running for a long time expecting it to disconnect after say 20 minutes of idle time you may be disap
227. ook 138 149 Microsoft Outlook Express 140 149 Microsoft Windows Messaging 138 Miscellaneous Property Page 206 Missing VPOP3 Icon 207 Modem Connection 25 Moderating Mailing Lists 88 90 Moderators of mailing lists 88 Modifying a User 46 Monitoring Messages 57 Moving VPOP3 to a different PC 208 MSN logon 113 Multiple copies of messages 184 Multiple Sites 55 MX record based Mail delivery 171 Name Expansion Order 208 NetBEUI 219 Netscape Messenger 4 152 Network Address Book 72 Novell Networks 219 NT 3 51 21 Offsite Users 55 Open Status 20 Order of Expanding Email Addresses 208 Out Mail 24 42 Outgoing Mail 24 42 Outgoing Mail Threshold 115 116 117 Outgoing Mail using Direct SMTP 43 Outlook 138 Outlook 98 138 149 Outlook Express 140 149 Outlook Express Add Account 140 Outlook Express EditAccount 143 OutMail Processors 209 Owner 88 Password Server 40 56 67 Passwords 56 67 Changing Remotely 56 67 Pegasus Mail 136 Perl 80 192 Personal Email Accounts 106 Phone Book 189 190 Plan 199 210 Set by Email 215 Playing WAV files 230 POP3 Incoming Mail 100 POP3 Server 40 POP3 Servers 28 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Post Connection Delay 216 Posting to mailing lists 88 89 Postmaster 49 Removing 49 Primary Connection 25 115 120 Priority Messages 200 Programs run by VPOP3 80 186 192 Property Page 28 38 40 42 167 174 176 2
228. or load the member list from a plain text file containing a single email address on each line Modifying Mailing List Message Headers Page 100 Mailing list message headers are normally modified slightly to create the mailing list behaviour By default VPOP3 modifies the headers of messages sent to mailing lists so that replies to mailing list messages go back to the mailing list If you have different or extra requirements you can change how VPOP3 modifies the message headers sent to a mailing list using this window List Header Modifications Hame F0 P3 Announce Specify any header fields you want modifed for this list Specity them as Headers co ander Zr Field Data Reply To 2m a i a Returm Receipt To Received then the field will be removed The following special values can be used as well a riginator ol List name E ah List moderator oe character The default settings are given above and they change Sender lt moderator gt This is so that some errors will be sent to the moderator rather than to the mailing list members Reply To lt mailing list address gt This is so that replies to messages from the mailing list go back to the mailing list User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Return Receipt To This removes the Return Receipt To field from mailing list messages so that receipts aren t generated by all the members on the maili
229. ot normally you won t want any pure AutoResponder users to be included No one This contains no Users Admins This contains all local Users defined as Administrators These groups cannot be edited but can be used directly or included in other lists Add Edit List This window allows you to set up the basic properties for a mailing list or distribution list It also allows you to set the list members You get to this window by choosing the Lists Property Page and then pressing Add or Edit Add List Ei List Type List Hame MyList a S Remote Member ny MendSmydoman com Mailing List Mailing List Properties Local Hames Add Remote Member Add gt gt Add All gt gt lt lt Remove Suspend Member Ban User g Allow Intermet Access to List OF Cancel Help Advanced List Members aaaaa Admins 5 autoevaluate e autoresponse ical autosubscribe E echo D evaluate M Show Users I Show Lists v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 9 VPOP3 Your email post office Adding Users to the List To add local users to the list choose the user or list names from the left hand list and press the Add button To add remote users to the list type the remote address in the box called Remote Member and press the Add Remote Member button Removing Users from the List To remove users from the list select the users in the righ
230. other offices Normally this isn t a problem since a correctly configured VPOP3 won t allow this but you should be aware of it if it would be possible for users to re configure VPOP3 2 Each site must be running VPOP3 3 Each VPOP3 will be dialling the ISP according to its schedule The ISP will not allow more than one connection at once so there may be conflicts This will result in VPOP3 reporting POP3 Client Errors such as Unable to lock mailbox 4 In the default configuration all sites will download all users mail and then discard the mail for users at other sites This can be reduced by using download rules but it is difficult to remove entirely 5 Some ISPs do not allow this sort of use in their terms and conditions To use this method 1 Designate one office to be the main office where mail to unrecognised users will be sent At the main office create Mappings for the users at the other offices to be REMOTE At the subsidiary offices tell VPOP3 to treat All Unknown Users as REMOTHE on the Admin page For instance if you have 4 users in two offices Sue and James in office 1 and Philip and Karen in office 2 We will say that office 1 is the main office Say that your email account has a domain name of cybercamels co uk Office 1 Configuration e A user called sue e A user called james e A mapping from philip to REMOTE e A mapping from karen to REMOTE e Accepted Domains of cyberc
231. p com 3 In POP3 User ID enter your mailbox account name this is usually the same as your dial up connection username 4 In POP3 Password enter your mailbox account password this is usually the same as your dial up connection password 5 In Accepted Domains type the email domains which this POP3 account handles e g mycompany com 6 In Use Connections select the connection you defined above 7 Press the Routing button to get to the Routing Page v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 33 VPOP3 Your email post office a Make sure you have selected According to recipient as the routing method b Disable the Use Received Fields option c Press OK 3 Go to the Out Mail Page 1 Choose SMTP 2 Enter the name of your ISP s SMTP server in the SMTP Relay Servers box e g smtp isp com 4 Go to the Local Mail Page 1 In Domain to Add to Unqualified Addresses enter your email domain e g mycompany com 2 Enable Route Local Mail Locally 3 In Local Mail Domains enter your email domain e g mycompany com 5 Go to the Users Page and define your local users 6 Go to the Schedule Page and define your connection schedule Permanent or Proxy connection to the Internet 1 Go to the Connection Page 1 Choose Use LAN for Connection 2 Check Use with Simple Schedule 3 Ifyou are connecting through a SOCKS proxy check the Connect Through SOCKS Server option You may need to go to step 5 and come back here la
232. pointed and get a big telephone bill If VPOP3 is collecting mail every 5 minutes the RAS connection will never get chance to be idle for 20 minutes If you want to use automatic disconnection it is probably best to check the Auto Connect once per RAS session box Page 28 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Incoming Mail Settings In Mail Property Page VPOP3 needs to know how to get mail from your ISP You set this on the In Mail property page VPOP3 Settings EA ES Out Mail Schedule Local Mail Misc Local Servers Admin Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists In Mail Connection wt 1 CI ce Remove f POPS Incoming C SMTP Incoming YPOPS File fer PUPS Server Incoming Mail Address mailcincouk eat UserID pscs Password pa W Do not download messages gt Jiao Kb Routing if Leave messages on server E days Accepted Domains Jpss co uk Use Connections 1 ChIP Be Demon W Enable E3 Clara T i ad eor e VPOP3 can get mail using the POP3 the SMTP protocol or the VPOP3 File Transfer method VPOP3 has more control over which messages it retrieves when using the POP3protocol If you need to use the SMTP protocol certain facilities such as limiting the size of retrieved messages leaving mail on server using download rules and using special routing methods aren t available You can create up to 1000 In
233. ponse lt Include filename gt Include the specified file at the current location in the response lt OnlyOnce gt Tells VPOP3 to keep a record of who has received a response so it will not send a message to the same address again To use a Response Definition Tag it must be the only thing on the line and must start at the beginning of the line The generated response will not show the tag If you want to begin a line with a real lt symbol prefix it with a symbol Including Attachments in automatic responses Page 82 If you want the response to include a binary attachment you must UUENCODE the attachment first use the lt Include gt tag to insert the generated text file Note that VPOP3 will try to read the file from the mailbox directory associated with the responder unless an explicit path to the file is given User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office You should not include MIME encoded files in automatic responses with the current version of VPOP3 because MIME encoded files need the message header to be modified and this version of VPOP3 does not support changing the headers from autoresponders UUENCODEd files do not need any header modifications so they will work without any problems Example Simple Autoresponders This topic shows a few of example simple autoresponders A basic information autoresponder This responds to a message to info yourdomain com with
234. porary control file returned by External AutoResponders AUTORESPONSE TXT Temporary message file returned by External AutoResponders BOUNCE MSG Custom bounce message CONNECT LOG Connection log CONNECT NOW If this exists VPOP3 connects immediately DLRULES DAT Download Rules ERRORS LOG VPOP3 Error log FINGERALLOWED DAT Restricts access to VPOP3 s Finger Server LDAPALLOWED DAT Restricts access to VPOP3 s LDAP Server MAILBOX MAP Mailbox Mapping Configuration File MAILHTTPALLOWED DAT Restricts access to VPOP3 s HTTP Mail Server NEXTUIDL DAT Binary file containing the next UIDL for VPOP3 to use PASSALLOWED DAT Restricts access to VPOP3 s Password Server POLLTIME DAT Empty file whose timestamp indicates when the last connection was made POP3ALLOWED DAT Restricts access to VPOP3 s SMTP Server POPIN TMP Temporary file used when downloading a message from a POPS server v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 195 VPOP3 Your email post office ROUTING DAT Temporary file used for External Routing ROUTING CTL Temporary control file returned by an External Router SCHEDULE DAT Complex Schedule Configuration File SMTPALLOWED DAT Restricts access to VPOP3 s SMTP Server SMTPFWD DAT LAN Forwarding Configuration File USER LST User Configuration File USERLIST LST User List Mailing Lists amp Distribution Lists Configuration File VPOP LOG Main VPOP3 Diagnostics log SMTPCLT LOG SMTPS
235. proxies for ports 110 and 25 Merely disabling the proxies might not work they might need to be removed totally You will then need to shutdown and restart both the Proxy Server and VPOP3 VPOP3 connects to the Internet via The ProxyServer This solution needs a bit more thought You need to reassign port numbers to services v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 227 VPOP3 Your email post office Probably the easiest way is to modify the WinGate proxies for ports 110 and 25 so that they work on ports 1110 and 1025 respectively instead Then in VPOP3 on the In Mail and Out Mail property pages change the Port for the POP3 Server to 1110 and the Port for the SMTP Server to 1025 VPOP3 slows stops when transferring large messages If VPOP3 slows stops when transferring large messages or messages with attachments there are various possible reasons for this all to do with problems with Windows 95 s TCP IP or dial up adapter You may not have problems with other software but that doesn t mean it s a problem with VPOP3 We have had this problem reported several times and each time it has turned out to be something else 1 Check with your ISP to see if they ve had similar problems reported before We ve had reports of this problem where the ISP has been able to fix it over the phone by telling you to change some specific settings 2 Download MTUSpeed from http www mjs u net com home htm This allows you to change some
236. r if the Domain Filtering list is not empty VPOP3 will only send mail to the listed domains So if the list is bibble com bobble com VPOP3 will only send mail to someone bibble com and someone bobble com not to any other email domain Outgoing Mail using Direct SMTP In the DNS Server entry you must type the IP address of your ISP s DNS server v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 47 VPOP3 Your email post office VPOP3 needs to query DNS entries for each message which it wants to send using this method to find out where to send the message to so it needs this value Page 48 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Users Users Property Page VPOP3 contains a list of Users Each User has an associated Mailbox The Mailbox is where messages for that person is stored Some users are configured to be Administrators Administrators are allowed to configure VPOP3 By default each user has a single Internet email address of mailboxname company co uk However by defining mappings you can make a user have multiple Internet email addresses or make a single Internet email address correspond to multiple users When you first install VPOP3 it is set up with a single user Postmaster who is an administrator and whose password is admin To configure VPOP3 you right click on the red post box in the Windows taskbar A menu should appear and you choose Properties
237. r POP3ALLOWED DAT SMTP Server SMTPALLOWED DAT see note 1 below Finger Server FINGERALLOWED DAT LDAP Server LDAPALLOWED DAT Password Server PASSALLOWED DAT ADMIN Servers ADMINALLOWED DAT Mail HTTP Server MAILHTTPALLOWED DAT File Format These text files have the format described below e Any line beginning with is ignored e Each line defines a range of IP addresses which can are either allowed or prohibited e Ifa line begins with a then the following range of addresses will be prohibited otherwise they are allowed v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 169 VPOP3 Your email post office e After the optional Each line contains either a single IP address or a range of IP addresses defined using Network address Subnet Mask For instance a line L92100 L70 250 200 20 500 Means that all addresses from 192 168 17 0 to 192 168 117 255 are prohibited e The DAT file is processed until either a matching address is found or the end of the file is reached e Unless otherwise defined all IP addresses are allowed To prohibit any addresses which aren t otherwise mentioned set the last line of the file to 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note if the Anti Relay method on the Tuning window is set to Check Client IP address then the SMTPALLOWED DAT file determines who can send external mail or only local mail Administrator Auto Logon If you are using VPOP3 in a trusted environment where you know that only people
238. ration Steps There are several steps to go through to make a basic VPOP3 configuration 1 vl Tell VPOP3 how to connect to the Internet Connections page 26 2 Tell VPOP3 how to get incoming mail from the Internet In Mail page 29 3 4 Tell VPOP3 how to handle local mail sent around your network Local Mail Tell VPOP3 how to send outgoing mail to the Internet Out Mail page 33 page 33 Set up local mailboxes for your network users Users page 49 Set up a schedule telling VPOP3 when to connect to the Internet Schedule page 26 The way that VPOP3 is configured is very dependent upon the email facilities provided by the Internet provider Because there are many different possibilities we will list a few of the main types of Internet email accounts here Email to lt anyone gt mydomain com or lt anyone gt subdomain isp com sent to a single POP3 mailbox 25 Email to myname isp com sent to a single POP3 mailbox 11 Email to lt anyone gt mydomain com or lt anyone gt subdomain isp com delivered using an SMTP feed 35 Email to userl mydomain com sent to one POP3 mailbox email to user2 mydomain com sent to another POP3 mailbox etc 37 You can mix these if you wish by setting up multiple Inward Mail configurations VPOP3 Setup Helper Page 24 The VPOP3 Setup Helper is a small entry window which appears when you run VPOPS3 for the first time This takes the basic settings for the most common configurations a
239. rce or export the database to a text file Import User List from NT Users is not yet implemented There is an external program called VP3NTUSR EXE available which will generate a VPOP3 user database from a Windows NT 4 user database Import User List from File allows you to import a VPOP3 User Database from a CSV Comma Separated Variables file CSV files can be generated from most database spreadsheet programs Export User List from File allows you to export the VPOP3 User Database to a CSV Comma Separated Variables file which can be read into most database spreadsheet programs Define User Groups allows you to define User Groups This lets you define standard characteristics for groups of users Edit Global Sig Headers lets you define a Standard Signature which will appear at the bottom of everyone s outgoing email messages it isn t added to internal email messages and also define global header modifiers in case you want to add remove custom header fields to all your outgoing messages Edit External Address Book lets you create and edit a global address book which everyone on the network can access using suitable LDAP client software such as Outlook Express Outlook 98 Eudora 4 Calypso Netscape Messaging etc This address book can contain entries about email addresses external to your network entries for local users should be set on the individual Edit Users windows v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 65
240. re are two numbers the first one outside the parentheses is the total size of messages sent received by that user the second number inside the parentheses is the number of messages sent received by that user The second section shows the size amp number of Internet messages sent amp received This has two columns Send and Receive which have the same meaning as for the first section The optional third section shows which mailboxes contain messages which are older than 24 hours This can be useful for seeing which users aren t reading their email The last section shows the total number of messages sent amp received by VPOP3 s POP3 amp SMTP client components Notes 1 VPOP3 determines who has sent a message by looking at the From field of the message The message must be from a Local Domain and it must be from a recognised user Messages from unrecognised users or non local domains will be omitted from the summary message 2 If you receive your Internet mail using SMTP instead of POP3 the Internet Mail Receive counts will be merged with the Local Mail Receive counts Restricting Server Access You can restrict access to VPOP3 s internal servers in two ways 1 By setting the Allow Connections On entries on the VPOP3 Local Servers Page 2 By creating Allowed text files in the VPOP3 directory as below Allowed Text Files File Names Each VPOP3 service has a different allowed file POP3 Serve
241. rently supported by VPOP3 SMTP Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is really intended for permanent connections to the Internet The SMTP client connects to an SMTP server to send a message There is no standard way of being able to request a message using SMTP When messages are sent using SMTP it is sent in two parts 1 An Envelope this contains the email address it was sent from typically for error reports and a list of people to receive the message This is not normally seen 2 The message Data this contains the message that you typically see The Envelope may contain a copy of the information in the Data s From and To header fields but it may contain other information which is not contained in the message at all for instance for mailing list messages or if BCC addressing is used If you have an SMTP account with your Internet Provider you need to run an SMTP server e g VPOP3 on your PC and then somehow tell your Internet Provider to start sending messages to it after you ve connected Some Internet Providers can automatically detect you dialing into them and immediately start sending mail to your SMTP server Other Internet Providers need you to issue a command eg Finger to their server to trigger mail delivery You can use an external program set as the VPOP3 Post Connection Extension to issue this command Once SMTP mail delivery has started there is really no way for th
242. rity with VPOP3 165 Sending Mail through VPOP3 42 Sequential POP3 gt SMTP Connection 217 Server Admin 172 Server Configuration 18 40 Set Assistant by Email 215 Set Finger Plan by Email 215 Set Forwarding by Email 215 Setting up the LDAP service in Calypso 158 Setting up the LDAP service in Eudora Pro 4 132 Setting up the LDAP service in Netscape Messenger 4 157 Setting up the LDAP service in Outlook 98 149 Setting up VPOP3 23 Setting up your TCP IP LAN 16 Setup Helper 20 Shutting Down VPOP3 170 211 Signature 62 Standard 62 Signatures 72 Simple Autoresponders 75 78 79 Examples 79 Simple Schedule 115 Single Email Address 63 Routing Messages with 62 63 108 Slow Message Send Receive Speed 176 SMTP Forwarding 38 182 223 SMTP Mail Service 101 SMTP Relays 171 SMTP Server 40 Socket Errors 226 227 228 10047 226 10048 227 10049 227 10054 227 10060 227 10061 227 10503 228 11001 228 Socket Timeouts 206 SOCKS Server 26 SOCKS V4 Firewall 207 Sounds 230 SPA Authentication 113 SPAM 161 216 Relay Prevention 216 Removal 161 164 Standard Signature 62 Standard Signatures 72 User Manual Page 235 VPOP3 Your email post office Startup Options 174 Step By Step Configuration 23 31 Inward SMTP 31 Stock Messages 74 Subject Routing 106 109 Subscribing to mailing lists 88 97 Summary Logs 168 TCP IP 16 The Microsoft Network 113 Thresholds for Outgoing Mail Sche
243. rmat string will also appear in the output string in the same location Picture Meaning h Hours with no leading zero for single digit hours 12 hour clock v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 81 VPOP3 Your email post office hh Hours with leading zero for single digit hours 12 hour clock H Hours with no leading zero for single digit hours 24 hour clock HH Hours with leading zero for single digit hours 24 hour clock m Minutes with no leading zero for single digit minutes mm Minutes with leading zero for single digit minutes S Seconds with no leading zero for single digit seconds SS Seconds with leading zero for single digit seconds t One character time marker string such as A or P tt Multicharacter time marker string such as AM or PM For example to get the time string 11 29 40 PM use the following picture string hh mmz ss tt Response Definition Tags You can modify the character of a Simple AutoResponder by typing a Response Definition Tag into the AutoResponder message text Possible Responder Definition Tags lt From address the response appears to have been sent from gt lt Subject subject line of the response gt lt Keep gt The incoming message is kept in the user s mailbox as well as being responded to lt NoKeep gt The incoming message is not kept in the user s mailbox lt AppendMsg gt Append the incoming message to the response The message only appears at the end of the res
244. rnal autoresponder The Browse button will change the name of the program to run it will leave any parameters as they are so that you can type them in manually Note If the path to the program to run contains spaces you will need to surround the name with quotes e g c program files perl perl exe responder pl VPOP3 stores the command in a file AUTORESPOND CMD in the user s mailbox directory Enable InMail methods using Mailer Daemon Using this methods you can control any In Mail methods which have a Routing method of Send Only To lt USERNAME gt To enable all In Mail methods which are set to send mail only to your mailbox send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Enable InMail The message text should contain the lines USERNAME lt username gt PASSWORD lt password gt You can also specify a subject line of Enable InMail lt in mail method name gt to enable a specific In Mail method If you aren t an administrator you can only enable methods for which you are the Send Only To recipient ENV Command Errors If you receive an error such as The VPOP3 POP3 Client Mail 1 0 has encountered an error whilst retrieving messages from your ISP POP3 server 2 The received error was ERR Unknown command env The last command sent by VPOP3 was ENV 1 This means you have mistakenly set the Use Demon POP3 Extensions option on the In Mail gt Routing wi
245. rned off VPOP3 will search those fields if it can t find any valid recipients in any other header fields e The Read Received Fields In Reverse option tells VPOP3 to search the Received header fields in reverse order Normally this is the best idea but with some situations it can cause problems such as misdirecting of email Only change this option if you are having problems Route with a Single Email Address This routing option can be useful if your ISP account doesn t support multiple email addresses If this option is selected VPOP3 will try to find a mailbox name in the text portion of the recipient address Say that you have an email address of joe hotmail com and you have VPOP3 mailboxes of louise and tim On the In Mail Property Page set the Accepted Domains list field to joe hotmail com and enable the Attempt to Work With Single Email Address option on the Routing page These are some of the addresses which VPOP3 will recognise lt joe hotmail com louise gt VPOP3 recognises louise tim lt joe hotmail com gt VPOP3 recognises tim louise joe hotmail com VPOP3 recognises louise lt joe hotmail com gt tim VPOP3 recognises tim louise lt joe hotmail com gt VPOP3 recognises louise tim lt joe hotmail com gt VPOP3 recognises tim lt joe hotmail com gt VPOP3 recognises joe joe hotmail com VPOP3 recognises joe VPOP3 will look for mailbox names in th
246. rwarding lists Mailing List Remote Administration The Allow Remote Administration option means that the moderator s can remotely add remove users to the list by sending messages to ListServer Allow Members to get Member List The Allow Members to get Member list option means that list members can send a USERS command to the ListServer to get a list of members of the list The list moderator can always get the list of members of the list Slow Posting to Mailing List Normally when messages are sent to a mailing list VPOP3 sends that message to all the list members by sending a single message with all the recipients addressed using the BCC method This means that the members email addresses are not contained in the message header at all If you enable the Slow Posting option VPOP3 will send a copy to each individual member with the To field of the message header set appropriately Note that this will be very slow if there are large numbers of members as a copy of each message has to be sent to each list member Distribute Message To Message Sender Page 98 The Distribute Message To Message Sender option lets you tell VPOP3 whether to send mailing list messages to the sender of the message or not Usually you want this option to be turned on since most people will want to know if their message has reached the list or not but in some cases you may want to turn the option off User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your em
247. s Info Connection l Irn Flail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Users Mappings Lists LocalMal Admn Main Administrator paul What to do with Incoming Mail for Unknown Recipients Send Eror Message to Main Administrator C Send Incoming Message to Main Administrator C Send Error Meg To Send Incoming Msg To Treat as HEMOTE Bounce message to sender Customise Bounce Message paul M Automatic Login Password z Close Generate Connection Error messages AAS Eror Messages l one Hel Require 4POP authentication Help Shutdown VPOPS Main Administrator also known as Default User The Main Administrator is the user which receives any error messages generated by VPOP3 and also email which cannot be automatically forwarded for instance if the target email address isn t recognised unless a different mailbox is specified below Initially this is configured to be the Postmaster mailbox but you may want to change this for instance if you want to remove the Postmaster mailbox What to do with Incoming Mail for Unknown Recipients This section lets you define how VPOP3 handles messages which are downloaded from the Internet using the POP3 protocol and are addressed to an unrecognised user or no recognisable user Note Messages sent locally or which are received from the Internet using SMTP always generate a bounce message these settings only apply to messages downloaded using P
248. s SMTP server in the SMTP Relay Servers box 4 Go to the Local Mail Page Page 36 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office 1 In Domain to Add to Unqualified Addresses enter your email domain 2 Enable Route Local Mail Locally 3 In Local Mail Domains enter your email domain 5 Go to the Misc Page Optionally enable If Outgoing Mail arrives whilst online send immediately 6 Go to the Users Page and define your local users 7 Go to the Schedule Page and define your connection schedule This will only apply to Outbound mail and if you have enabled If Outgoing Mail arrives whilst online send immediately in 5 1 above this isn t necessary Configure Multiple POP3 mailboxes This topic gives step by step instructions for configuring VPOP3 to work with several POP3 email accounts where email to each account goes to a different local user For the sake of this example we will assume that Your email domain is mycompany com and you have two POP3 accounts one called userl_mycompany which gets mail to userl1 mycompany com and one called user2_mycompany which gets mail to user2 mycompany com The ISP s POP3 mail server is pop3 isp com and the SMTP mail server is smtp isp com Dial up connection to the Internet 1 Go to the Connection Page Choose USE RAS FOR CONNECTION Enter the details for your dial up connection in the RAS DETAILS section Note you should have configured and tested a W
249. s of distribution lists but is one of the most common ways of handling distributed sites VPOP3 has a feature which should make this a lot easier to manage See Import Forwarding Lists help topic for more information For instance if you have 4 users in two offices Sue and James in office 1 and Philip and Karen in office 2 We will say that office 1 is the main office Say that your main email account has a domain name of cybercamels co uk and your subsidiary email account has an address of cybercamels2 isp co uk Office 1 Configuration e A user called sue e A user called james e A distribution list called philip with a single Remote Member of cybercamels2 isp co uk e A distribution list called karen with a single Remote Member of cybercamels2 isp co uk e Accepted Domains of cybercamels co uk e Local Mail Domain of cybercamels co uk e This should collect mail from the cybercamels co uk account Office 2 Configuration e A user called philip e A user called karen e A distribution list called sue with a single Remote Member of sue cybercamels co uk e A distribution list called james with a single Remote Member of james cybercamels co uk e Accepted Domains of cybercamels co uk e Local Mail Domain of cybercamels co uk e This should collect mail from the cybercamels2 isp co uk account Page 180 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Distributed Sites Using LAN Forwarding
250. sabled individually Allow messages to Mailer_Daemon to enable disable an individual s In Mail configuration Allow Forward To addresses to be enabled disabled simply Allow messages to Mailer_Daemon to be used to set enable disable Forward To settings Support Home User version Make list subscription notification messages to moderators come From listserver with Reply To lt subscriber gt Skip blank lines in LIST output from ISP POP3 servers to work with some buggy ISPs Always send STAT before a LIST command to an ISP POP3 server to work with some buggy ISPs which can t handle a LIST command on an empty mailbox Allow Simple Schedule times wrap around midnight Support a maximum limit on outgoing message sizes per user Support configurable bounce messages Make SMTP progress bar go up slightly for large recipient lists as well as for sending data Make backup of USER LST if a temporary licence expires Write useful information stats to VPOP3 LOG when VPOP3 starts up for problem determination use Allow you to prefix mappings with In to only allow the mapping to work on incoming email useful for handling incoming messages from mailing lists What s new in VPOP3 VI1 2 4 v 1 3 0 May 1999 Basic LDAP server Mailing list signatures Mailing list digests Support a new VPOP3 File Transfer method for sending files between two VPOP3 servers witho
251. saeE Ene AutoResponder CON Oat eee CONT Ol FIEF OMAT enen ERA CERISE ET OURO RT ET RT OT EEUERPPT ET OT ER UERPRPR REST RY rrr TTT rT TOT rT ETS Lists Property Page Adding EISi rennen sc casescecesceceesescescececeeseserstes EORR ERC SS ONE verroa EEEE ESEO I EEEE EEEE Built in Gr OUDS cece ctiecrrerenmnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnemmmnnnnnmmmieeeeecs PINS Caresse E E EE E IETA Adding Users t the LSC aceissscssscececececcsesessscaassanscasacacacsssasesansasssassnasssssnanerececccucueuaiaamumanenneneee Removing Users from the List se ssossossoessssesressesreseosessesseoseeseeseessessessesseesesreeseeseoseeseresee Suspending Banning List MembersS ssesseessessessessessseseessessesressrereoseoreoseeseoseoseeseeseessesseeseese Allowing Intern t Access to th LiStrssssssssssssssssissssssssreseereereevessesvesescesscsssessesssnereresrsdrsssssss Configuring Mane SOS cccccsccscocsnscscscscesvssenevesevevsevsvsvevensvsnsnaenande cece se sadedededecedeececeatetdididiarateancen Ba EILA LENG Care ceases tec u eee yee sete AEE S E A Creating a VPOP3 Mailing Listscsescscsesesssssescssssasssasasasasssasasasasnsasnvaxacasasnesnansnanansncaretmmanmmtauemnate PANNING List RrOpeP SS e Usine A VPOP3 Mailing Listenin LAE Defining who can send messages to the list csssssscsececesssscececececesesesessssecscsesesceesees Moderating Mailing LIStScecssceiceeseesioceis isnan anE Er EEEE ERRA Mailing List Subscription Unsubscription e
252. se Same Allow Connections Addresses tells VPOP3 that you want to allow access to all the servers from the same adapter This is the normal option The Default button puts all the settings back to their original defaults in case things get messed up and you forget the original settings v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 45 VPOP3 Your email post office Out Mail Settings Out Mail Property Page You define how VPOP3 is to send outgoing mail on the Out Mail property page POP3 Settings EE Misc Headers Logging Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists Local Mail l Admin Connection l InMal Out Mal Schedule Local Servers Conn fi CIsIF f Wia SMTP Relay C VPOP File fer C SMTP Direct Me Records SMTP Outgoing Mail Relay Servers mail compulink co uk Close Help Domain Filtering E mail Domains for which thi Connection can be used for outgoing mall You can define Outward Mail settings for each VPOP3 Connection This is to allow Sending of mail whichever Connection VPOP3 uses Many ISPs are now implementing anti relay measures to prevent their mail servers being used by spammers The effect of this is that you can only use their SMTP servers if you are accessing the Internet through one of their modems You may also run other in house mail servers at other sites Using this method you can send certain mail to those servers whilst sending generic Internet ma
253. section name AutoResponder Date Format Strings You use the following character sequences to expand to be current date values If you enclose text in single quotes it will appear in the same location in the output string Any spaces you use in the format string will also appear in the output string in the same location Picture Meaning d Day of month as digits with no leading zero for single digit days dd Day of month as digits with leading zero for single digit days ddd Day of week as a three letter abbreviation Locale specific abbreviations are used dddd Day of week as its full name Locale specific names are used M Month as digits with no leading zero for single digit months MM Month as digits with leading zero for single digit months MMM Month as a three letter abbreviation Locale specific abbreviations are used MMMM Month as its full name Locale specific names are used y Year as last two digits but with no leading zero for years less than 10 yy Year as last two digits but with leading zero for years less than 10 yyyy Year represented by full four digits For example to get the date string Wed Aug 31 94 use the format string ddd MMM dd yy AutoResponder Time Format Strings You use the following character sequences to expand to be current time values If you enclose text in single quotes it will appear in the same location in the output string Any spaces you use in the fo
254. sending a plain text username and password over the network from the email client to the server It can be possible for people on your network to intercept these plain text passwords The person doing this would have to be quite knowledgeable to do this User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office An alternative method supported by VPOP3 and some email clients is a method called APOP authentication In this method the password is sent in an encrypted form So if you are worried about security and you know that all your email clients support the APOP method you can turn this option on to make VPOP3 refuse any connection which does not use the APOP method Note If this option is left turned off VPOP3 will accept either the plain text or the APOP authentication method Shutdown VPOP3 Press this button to close the VPOP3 server software You can also close the VPOP3 software from the VPOP3 menu if it is enabled on the Misc page gt Custom Bounce Messages A Bounce message is a message which is sent to the sender of a message if the recipient is unreachable or unrecognised VPOP3 lets you define your own message to be sent to people who send you email across the Internet addressed to a user which VPOP3 doesn t recognise Creating a Custom Bounce Message You can create a custom bounce message by pressing the Customise Bounce Message button on the Admin Page This file should contain the text of the
255. ses ssssssssseesessesressessesseoseeseeseessessesresreeseossesseesee Confidential Mailing Lists ices E IM PORE Forwarding Liste 255 siete cucnsenreteseusnsieasensesusSsessioeets soboencscesnedeadeiedeces Example US aE E n eL Mailing List Remote Administration sescevevsvevevsvevsnerscosnsnsnsnsnsnensnsescscscsnsesesesesesesssesteesessssvesesssens Allow Members to get Member List sssssscscscscecscscecssesessessecsesesesesesescsescseeeseseseneeseees Slow Fosting to Mailing List eee ee ee OPP Distribute Message To Message Sender uuu ssssssssssssesesecscscecececececececcececscscecscscsescseeeeees Mailing List LISS SCS speach sates SEE ES EEE E EIRENE Mailing List Moderated POSES sxteccccececesssceveresesceccereeecceveresvecee es escesueveveseseeseecsuccesuevaeesesesssess aieins Advanced List Ca Coca eats ah he at att cia anten nesta a Modifying Mailing List Message Headers esesssecessesececseecececeeesesceees ListServer operation Generally available ListServer COMMANGG scssscsceceeeececeeeeeesectceeeeeeeees Remote Administration Listserver COMMANGG sscececeesecececeeeeeteeees The Info Property Page Incoming Mail Bookmark not defined SPT PM COM ie IMAI esses tecetacs saci tect Secs E E Using Multiple ISP Email Accounts Accepted Domains Routing Downloaded Messages Routing According To Recipient sirier tnise no r rnanan Route with a Single Email AddresS s ssesessesesesossesesesssres
256. software may not work correctly How to Write to STDOUT To write to STDOUT you need to use functions which normally write to the screen In C C use printf text n In PERL use print text n In Batch Files use ECHO text AutoResponder Control File The use of this file is not recommended the External AutoResponder should use the Environment Variables to obtain the same information instead For backwards compatibility when the External Autoresponder program is started it receives a single parameter which specifies the full path to a control v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 87 VPOP3 Your email post office Control File Format This control file is a text file containing 7 lines 1 The user ID of the person to whom the message was sent i e the name of the autoresponder User ID 2 The email address of the person who sent the message the From field of the incoming message 3 The subject line of the original message 4 The name of the mailbox to which the original message was sent 5 The filename of the incoming message file ideally this should be ignored and the STDIN file handle should be used instead 6 The Reply To address of the incoming message or the same as 2 if there was no Reply To address 7 A O zero or 1 one indicating whether the incoming message is to be kept or not this is set from the Add User gt Keep option AutoResponder STD
257. specified value is a substring of the actual value so a line containing X Priority 1 will match with both X Priority 1 or X Priority Highest 1 If a priority message is detected VPOP3 can optionally connect immediately to the connection required for outgoing messages and deliver all outgoing messages and collect incoming messages from any servers supported by that connection Note This facility relies on the email client software adding a header field to indicate that a message is urgent Not all email clients do this in this case VPOP3 cannot detect whether a message is urgent or not A notable example of an email client which doesn t add an urgent header field is Microsoft Windows Messaging Outlook Unfortunately there is no workaround since there is no difference between an urgent or non urgent message generated by Outlook Delivery Receipts A Delivery Receipt is a message sent to the sender of a message when the recipient retrieves the message from VPOP3 The sender s email client indicates that a receipt is required by adding a header field to the message v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 199 VPOP3 Your email post office The Generate Delivery Receipts On area should contain the field names to look for to decide whether to send a delivery receipt or not If the entry area is blank delivery receipts are never sent Note that the entry area only contains field names The field data is assu
258. ssistant option is turned off then the message is sent to the forwarding address You will typically use the Forward To box if a user temporarily wants to collect their email from a remote site You can easily turn on or off the Forward To by using the Use Forwarding Address checkbox This means that you don t have to keep entering and deleting the address in the Forward To box Note You can also set clear the forwarding address by email by sending messages to the Mailer_Daemon user or by using a web browser see Mail HTTP Server If you precede the Forwarding Address with the text SMTP then VPOP3 will use LAN Forwarding to send all mail for this user to another email server on your LAN WAN In this case you should specify the Forwarding Address as SMTP lt recipient gt lt serveraddress gt 3 There is a default distribution list called Everyone which normally contains all users You can choose not to include any particular users for instance if they are autoresponders or other special users by clearing the Put User in Everyone List box 4 Clearing the Allow Sending of Internet Mail box will prevent this user from sending Internet email they will still be able to send local email Note VPOP3 can only see who is sending a message by looking at the From field of the message being sent so it is possible for a knowledgeable person to get around this limitation 5 Ifyou enter an email address in the Change Internet Mai
259. sts Local Mail l Admin Misc Headers Logging Diagnostics Info i VPOPS Version 1 3 0 Copyright 21997 1999 Paul Smith Computer Services Licence Information Licenced to four Name Here Max Users 25 Expiry Date Does Not Expire For Support click one of the links below Close Email suppotiipescs co uk Or browse at http www pscs co uk sottware pop3 htm Help d to open the Register dialogue box Page 22 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office POP3 Registration ki Mame Your Mame Here Number of Users P5 Expiry Date fo Licence Kep Your Registration Code Here Cancel Help Enter the registration details you were sent when you purchased a VPOP3 license or when you obtained an evaluation license It isn t unknown for people to have problems entering their key code This is often due to the following reasons e Extra Spaces or punctuation in the registered name e Changed letter case in the registered name The registered name must be entered in exactly the same format as the registration details you were sent e The characters lower case L and 1 digit one or O upper case o 0 digit zero being mistaken in the key License keys never contain the digits 0 or 1 so these characters must be the appropriate letter e Spaces before or after the license key v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 23 VPOP3 Your email post office VPOP3 Configu
260. sunanedeucueaueeeecueardionsdion 63 STOE S Ve DO Ces E ee 64 ESV FOrma E Faila veeaseveyueveveevvevevueveun sates cyatevu Ueda sivastbteepioe lon iests 64 Global Signature amp Header Modifiers csssssssscsscssssessscesesscesescesessecsscessesesecseeeesees 65 Change Internet Email Reply Address essssssssssssesecesssssesesecssssssesescucsssssecucsesesesececucasssseecussesesesecnenes 66 Internet Reply Address Usage Example nessssesssessesessesesessssesesessesesesessesessssesesesesseses 67 Messages to Multiple Recipients s sosososesesessesossssosesesesesesesesesessssssosesesesesesesesesessssesesese 68 Web Page User Access 69 AEE AMEE E E I aes ENAA A E A T A E ETE 69 VV eD Browser Message LisErsensimireurininininina a a a 70 Changing Password using a Web BrowsSet sccsssssccsscsssssscessssssessscssescseeessceeesseeeeeees 7 Web Browser User Setting Sanrion aae E T TTS 72 Status Window 72 NOD CU SS Aa 75 Queue Browser 76 Copying Messages between Mailboxes 0 tesssssssecesessececeeesseceseesesscceceesscsceneeeessceceees 71 Advanced User Database Configuration Options ccccssssscssssceeecscsesscesescessecseeessees 65 AutoResponders 78 Simple AUtORESPONGELS cccsssseccssesescsseceesscssessscesescssessscessscesessceecsceeessscesesseecsssceseasecseeees 78 Mes SA SC ON a E ASSEN aac ca ccces cee ceracaeacstaectaest 79 Inline Expansion Tags renere EE ERIR ET OOE mean 80 AutoResponder Date Form
261. t VPOP3 Error Messages This list does not contain an exhaustive list of error messages which VPOP3 generates as there are too many to list and most of them should never be encountered If you come across an error message which is not listed here contact VPOP3 support This list contains only those error messages which are emailed to the Main Administrator in VPOP3 it does not describe messages logged in VPOP3 LOG or ERRORS LOG VPOP3 POP3 Client Connection Problem These errors occur during the period when VPOP3 is trying to establish a connection to your ISP s POP3 mail server to receive incoming mail They can mean that you have entered the POP3 Server address incorrectly or that there is a problem with the Dial up Networking or RAS connection settings or that your ISP s mail server is not working properly If the message text is Pop3 Client not started Couldn t connect to server XXXX YY Then this means that VPOP3 was having a problem connecting to the Mail Server entry called XXXX Following this text there should be a further description of the specific error which occurred VPOP3 POP3 Client Problem These errors occur whilst VPOP3 is communicating with your ISP s POP3 mail server to retrieve your mail If the message text is Page 224 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Error with Pop3 Client XXXX YY The server connection was closed unexpectedly This means
262. t 161 gt 161 10047 Socket Error 226 10048 Socket Error 227 228 10049 Socket Error 227 10054 Socket Error 227 10060 Socket Error 227 10061 Socket Error 227 10503 Socket Error 228 11001 Socket Error 228 Accepted Domains 28 102 105 Adding a List 86 Adding a User 46 Address Book 73 189 190 191 Global 189 190 Address Expansion 208 Address Exploding 208 Admin Property Page 211 Admin Server 40 172 Administration 172 Remotely 172 Administrator Logon 170 Advanced List Features 95 Aliases 36 50 52 Description 50 Allocated Users 72 Allow Connections from Menu 206 Allow Connections on IP Address 40 Allow Shutdown from Menu 206 APOP Authentication 212 Ask Rule 161 Assistants 52 210 215 Query by Email 210 Set by Email 215 Attachments 195 Virus Checking 193 Authentication 212 Auto Logon 170 Auto Responder 83 172 Control Output 172 Input File 83 STDERR Output File 172 STDIN Input File 83 STDOUT Output File 83 Auto Responders 46 74 75 76 78 80 81 82 83 Inserting Date Time 76 Inserting Originator 76 Inserting Subject 76 v 1 3 0 May 1999 Messages Depending on Subject 75 Testing 82 AutoConnect 26 Automatic Logon 211 Automatically Logging on 170 AUTORESPOND TXT 74 AutoResponder Control File 83 AutoResponder Date Format Strings 77 AutoResponder Environment Variables 82 AutoResponder STDOUT Output File 83 AutoResponder Time Format Strings
263. t hand list and press the Remove button Suspending Banning List Members To suspend mailing list members you cannot suspend distribution list members select the users in the right hand list and check the Suspend box Suspended list members still appear in the member list and they count as members if they post messages but they do not receive messages sent to the mailing list If a Suspended member asks to join the list he she will become un suspended To ban mailing list members you cannot ban distribution listmembers select the users in the right hand list and check the Ban User box Banned list members appear in the member list but they cannot join the list they do not count as members for posting to the list so they cannot post to listswhich are limited to members only and they do not receive messages sent to the mailing list Allowing Internet Access to the List The Allow Internet Access to List button should be checked if you want remote people to be able to send messages to the list If it is not checked the list is only accessible internally any Internet mail arriving to the list will be treated as if the recipient isn t recognised Note The Internet accessibility of a list is determined by the root list so if list A is nested within list B and list B is accessible from the Internet but list A isn t a remote user sending an email message to user B will also send the message to all members of list A Als
264. tch gt note the fieldname and text must be separated by a colon a space Except for the three exceptions below fieldname is the name of any email message header field read the relevant RFCs which define email message formats Size This fieldname compares the text with the message size If the message size is greater than the number specified in the text the rule entry will match this can also be negated with a Rept This fieldname checks to see if the text matches a recipient of the message after mapping and assistants have been processed The rule entry will match if that recipient name is an intended recipient of the message being processed Any This fieldname matches any email message header field Notes If a rule condition is only lt fieldname gt then any message header containing this header field will match If there are no rule conditions the rule will always be triggered this is useful if you want to change the default behaviour from Download to Ask for instance Examples From bill microsoft com This condition will match if the email address came from bill microsoft com X Mailer Eudora This condition will match if the sender used the Eudora email client to send the message Size 10000 This condition will match if the message is less than or equal to 10000 bytes long if there wasn t a before Size then it would match if the message was greater than 10000 bytes Down
265. ter 2 Go to the In Mail Page Choose POP3 Incoming 2 In POP3 Server Address enter the name of your ISP s POP3 server e g pop3 isp com 3 In POP3 User ID enter your mailbox account name this is usually the same as your dial up connection username 4 In POP3 Password enter your mailbox account password this is usually the same as your dial up connection password 5 In Accepted Domains type the email domains which this POP3 account handles e g mycompany com 6 In Use Connections select the connection you defined above 7 Press the Routing button to get to the Routing Page d Make sure you have selected According to recipient as the routing method e Disable the Use Received Fields option f Press OK Page 34 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office 3 Go to the Out Mail Page 1 Choose SMTP 2 Enter the name of your ISP s SMTP server in the SMTP Relay Servers box e g smtp isp com 4 Go to the Local Mail Page 1 In Domain to Add to Unqualified Addresses enter your email domain e g mycompany com 2 Enable Route Local Mail Locally 3 In Local Mail Domains enter your email domain e g mycompany com 5 Go to the Misc Page e If you have a proxy connection turn off If Outgoing Mail arrives whilst online Send Immediately e If you have a permanent connection you can leave this option on or off as you prefer e Ifyou are connecting through a SOCKS Proxy enter
266. ternal Email Address as domain com This tells VPOP3 to send mail to lt anyone gt domain com to the chosen Mailbox or part1 part2 domain com This uses a wildcard to allow any text instead of the asterisk domain com This tells VPOP3 to send mail to lt anyone gt domain com to the chosen Mailbox only if no other recipient has matched the address v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 55 VPOP3 Your email post office in user domain com This tells VPOP3 only to check this mapping on incoming email not on local or outgoing email from user domain com This tells VPOP3 to use this mapping to compare the FROM address of the incoming email it only works on incoming email not local or outgoing email VPOP3 will go through all Mappings for each mail message so if there are multiple mappings from a single address VPOP3 will send the message to multiple mailboxes Note you should NOT need a VPOP3 mapping to make mail for user yourdomain com be sent to the user mailbox You need to ensure that the Accepted Domains field on the In Mail property page is set correctly Common Uses of Mailbox Mappings Common uses for mailbox mappings are Sending mail for a sales address to your salesperson s own mailbox Allowing user aliases for instance user jim may also have an email address james Routing incoming mailing list messages correctly Allowing someone to read someone s messages if th
267. the maximum size of message which can be posted to the mailing list This can be useful for filtering out messages with attachments for instance a maximum size of 10kB will be large enough for most messages but too small for most messages with attachments If this value is set to 0 zero there is no maximum message size The mailing list is controlled by one or more moderators You choose the moderator s name in the Moderator list This can either be a single local user or a distribution list you can have a remote moderator by creating a distribution list containing them as a member VPOP3 creates an automatic alias of mailinglisthame_Owner to the moderator name For instance if Arnold is the moderator of the mailing list modelplanes then VPOP3 will send all messages to modelplanes_owner to Arnold Using A VPOP3 Mailing List Once you have a VPOP3 mailing list set up people contribute to it by sending email to lt listname gt lt yourdomain gt For instance if you own an email domain gadgets com and you set up a VPOP3 mailing list called widgets anyone sending a message to widgets gadgets com will send a message to the mailing list members You can specify who can contribute to a mailing list on the Mailing List Properties window There are three main options e Allow anyone to post e Allow only members to post e Allow only moderators to post There is also another option which can be chosen along with the above thr
268. the connection between VPOP3 and a remote computer normally your ISP was dropped at an unexpected time This is different from the error 10054 in that this is a controlled line drop A common way this can happen is if the ISP s POP3 server uses an obsolete standard which allows it to drop the connection if a POP3 LIST command is performed on an empty mailbox The current standard requires that the connection is not dropped until the client VPOP3 performs a QUIT command Socket Error 1001 Host not found authoritative answer This means that the ISP POP3 or SMTP server which you have told VPOP3 to connect to does not currently exist This might be that you have mistyped the server address or that your ISP is having temporary problems or that you are using an internal DNS server or proxy which is either slow or not configured correctly Using VPOP3 on the same machine as a Proxy Server If you are using VPOP3 on the same computer as a proxy server such as WinGate WinProxy FireDoor etc you might get an Error 10048 Specified Address Already In Use when you try to start VPOP3 This is caused because both VPOP3 and WinGate are trying to provide a service on TCP IP ports 25 and 110 Port 25 is the SMTP port and Port 110 is the POP3 port There are two possible solutions VPOP3 connects to the Internet directly not via the Proxy Server This is the easiest solution In the Proxy Server configuration remove the
269. the mailbox which this AutoResponder is running for SUBJECT This is the subject line of the incoming message MAILBOXDIR This is the directory of the mailbox which this AutoResponder is running for For backwards compatibility there is also an AutoResponder Control File but the use of this is not recommended Testing the AutoResponder Page 86 Testing External Autoresponders can be tricky First of all you should write the program Let s say it s a PERL script called RESPONSE PL and it is executed by running C PERL PERL EXE RESPONSE PL You should put that command into the AutoRespond CMD file in the user s mailbox directory Next go to the VPOP3 Diagnostics Property Page and enable the Keep Temporary Files option Now you should send an appropriate test message to the AutoResponder user If all works fine good but otherwise You can look at the AUTORESPONSE TXT and AUTORESPONSE CTL files in the VPOP3 directory The text in these may indicate what went wrong You may want to test the External Autoresponder manually To do this find the appropriate input files which were used in the test The input control file will Copy the input control file and input message file into the main VPOP3 directory for ease of use Next you will need to edit the input message file and delete the first 4 characters which will probably not be standard characters Also set the values of the Environment Variables
270. to ListServer should contain the following lines before the remote administration commands Moderate lt listname gt Password lt list password gt The remote administration commands should be terminated with the line EndModerate Valid remote administration commands are Add Remove Each of these commands should be followed by a list of members to add or remove and the list is terminated by EndAdd or EndRemove as appropriate Any line beginning with a is ignored If you also add the command Quiet then VPOP3 will not send an acknowledgement message back to the moderator Example The following is a valid remote administration message Moderate Mylist Password passwd Add this 1S a comment Simon brown com karen bobble org EndAdd Remove a naughty user EndRemove EndModerate Page 214 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Tuning Parameters On the VPOP3 Diagnostics page there is a button called Tuning Pressing this will take you to a window where you can set certain tuning troubleshooting options in VPOP3 Tuning POP3 Ei EI Check from LAN kd aisem ema He These options are described briefly below v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 215 VPOP3 Your email post office Connections When VPOP3 establishes a connection to the Internet it attempts to connect to your ISP mail servers To try to get around transient errors which can occur at the start of a conne
271. to be sent from your PC it will also collect any incoming mail during this connection Note There is currently no way of specifying a common schedule for more than one day using this method except by cutting and pasting text in your editor Scheduling Multiple Server connections If you have multiple Connections configured you can schedule different connections at different times using SCHEDULE DAT By default all connections which are specified as Use With Simple Schedule will connect at each schedule time However if you prefix the In or Out with one or more special characters you can specify which connection s that entry refers to Prefix with 0 9 Indicates Connection 1 10 respectively sorry for the slight confusion Indicates that ALL connections must happen Indicates that all primary connections must happen You can use several characters for each entry e g 0138In 08 00 This means that connections 0 primary 1 3 and 8 happen at 8 00am There may be more than one RAS session to facilitate this 90ut 14 00 This means that all the Primary connections and connection 9 will happen at 2 00pm only if there is outgoing mail to be sent Specifying Outgoing Connection Thresholds Page 18 When specifying Out connection times you can also set a threshold between 1 and 7 for the number of messages which must be waiting to be sent before a connection is made you can specify larger thresholds but only
272. ts to ensure that there is always at least one administrator defined If you really want to delete the current administrator you must close the properties dialog and re enter it using a different administrator s name Advanced Pressing the Advanced button brings up a window which lets you do things with the whole user list rather than a specific user Page 50 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Add Edit a user By pressing the ADD or EDIT button on the Users Property Page you can add or edit a VPOP3 mailbox Add User Ei User Id s broswich Group Normal Password ee Autoresponders None F Administrator S ioi Edit Tert Assistant ftony External Edit Eommand F Send Only to Assistant IY Keep M Orly Once Clear Forward To User Finger Information P Use Forwarding Address Edit User Information M Put User in Everyone list Edit User Plan M Allow Sending of Internet Mail T Monitor Messages Change Internet Mail Reply o S Address to Max Internet Outgoing Size 0 kE U no lirit EaR Help Edit LDAP Data This example shows the Add User window The Edit User window is very similar Basic Configuration to Add a New User 1 Enter the ID of the user you want to create in the User ID box Note that User ID s should NOT contain spaces use a period full stop instead and can be up to 32 characters long Note This box is
273. tures of VPOP3 POP3 Settings EES Connection l In Mail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers M Allow Connections from Menu M Allow Shutdown from Meru Socket Timeouts Define YPOPSE stensions Servers 300 secs Clients 300 secs Users Mappings Lists Local Mail l Admin Hise O Heades Logging Diagnostics Ino Base Directory H wpop34MAlL Tlf Outgoing mail arrives whilst online send immediately SOCKS 4 Firewall SOCKS Server Address SOCKS Server Port 1080 SOCKS Server User Name abe Close Help The Base Directory field shows you where the VPOP3 root data directory is You cannot change this setting except via the Windows Registry Menu Settings The Allow Connections from Menu and Allow Shutdown from Menu options are described in the VPOP3 Security topic Socket Timeouts The Socket Timeouts options allow you to set timeouts for sending and receiving data Two timeouts are configurable Server This is the timeout used when an email client program connects to VPOP3 Client This is the timeout used when VPOP3 connects to your ISP Both timeouts are measured in seconds The default values of 300 seconds 5 minutes are acceptable for most situations but you may wish to change them It normally wouldn t be sensible to reduce them to less than 30 seconds or increase them to more than 600 seconds 10 minutes Extension Programs Press the Define VPOP3 Exte
274. u will receive a message in a few seconds showing the assistant defined for the requested user Note If the USERNAME entry does not match the sender of the message the user defined by USERNAME will receive a notification message saying that the Query Assistant command was sent Query Finger Plan using Mailer Daemon To query your Finger Plan by email send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Query Plan Mailer_Daemon determines which user to change the Plan for by looking at the address that the message came From and it will send you a message containing your Finger Plan within a few seconds Query Forwarding Settings using Mailer Daemon Page 208 To query your Forwarding Settings by email send a message to Mailer_Daemon with a subject line of Query Forwarding The message text should contain the lines USERNAME lt username gt PASSWORD lt password gt The message response will show the forwarding settings defined for the requested user Note If the USERNAME entry does not match the sender of the message the user defined by USERNAME will receive a notification message saying that the Query Forwarding command was sent User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Administration The Admin Property Page The Admin property page lets you specify certain features related to administrators error messages etc POP3 Settings Ei Ei Misc Headers Logging Diagnostic
275. uld be interpreted by VPOP3 to mean send this message to the mailbox called fred You could change the search text to be for in which case VPOP3 will look for for followed by a recipient s name followed by If you use this method of routing it is probably a good idea to change the Mail for Unrecognised Users setting to Send Normal Mail to Default User This is because this method depends upon people sending you messages getting it right and so it will often not work If VPOP3 can t find the search text it will send it to the default user and it s easier to handle from then on if it hasn t added the error message to the start of the incoming message v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 109 VPOP3 Your email post office Common ISP Settings Here are the VPOP3 settings for some ISPs which support unlimited mail address to a single POP3 Account Let us know of any others you know of e Configuring VPOP3 for Demon Internet Services 110 e Configuring VPOP3 for CIX Internet 111 e Configuring VPOP3 for ClaraNet 111 e Configuring VPOP3 for Global Net 112 Here are some configuration details for other common ISPs which only support a single email address e Configuring VPOP3 for Compuserve 112 e Configuring VPOP3 for MSN 113 Configuring VPOP3 for Demon Internet Services To configure VPOP3 for use with Demon Internet www demon co uk Go to the In Mail page 1 Choose the POP3 Incoming method 2 I
276. ur ISP The simplest way is via a LAN connection but normally you will want to use RAS in Windows NT or DUN in Windows 95 actually both of these effectively are the same thing and will simply be called RAS from now on in this help file and within VPOP3 To configure a connection choose the Connection tab in the VPOP3 settings You should see a dialog box like this YPOPS Settings EES Misc Headers Logging l Diagnostics Info Users Mappings Lists Local Mail Admin Connection Iri Ml ail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Connection Connection Method 1 ChIP Use LAN for conmection ChIP Use AAS for connection Hang up Now RAS Details RAS Connection crx ee Retiies 2 User Name pscs Interval 1 5 Password z Ti 11 RAS Connections which can alzo be used if established RCI 2 Close i A Cl IP London Configure AutoConnect AClaraNET Help T Connect Through SOCKS Server M Use with Simple Schedule The list under Connection contains the a list of 10 connection methods which can be used to communicate with your ISP mail servers You can rename the connections by typing into the edit field under the Connection list These names are purely for display purposes and appear in on screen displays and error messages The Connection Method options let you choose a LAN connection in which case many of the other fields are disabled or a RAS connection De
277. using the command line SET command Now you can call your External Autoresponder program manually In this example you would type C PERL PERL EXE RESPONSE PL DR DAT lt D DAT the filename of the input message file This should call your External Autoresponder and display on the screen the text sent to both the STDOUT and STDERR files You can redirect this output to other temporary files if you wish User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office AutoResponder STDIN Input File The STDIN input file is redirected to the incoming message text This text includes the message header To skip the message header look for the first blank line Everything before that was the header everything after it is message text How to read STDIN To read the incoming message text you must use functions which read standard input In C C you can use functions like gets and scanf In PERL use var lt STDIN gt In 4DOS Batch Files Use INPUT or external commands which read standard Input In Normal Batch Files You need to use external commands which read standard input AutoResponder STDOUT Output File The STDOUT output file is redirected to the outgoing automated response message text The External Autoresponder MUST generate the necessary message headers It should at least generate To From Date Subject If you don t generate these header fields the recipient s email client
278. ut requiring TCP IP eg with Windows 95 dial in server Support in out local message monitoring Add Tuning window to Diagnostics page Add Message Id on all messages sent through VPOP3 if it isn t already there Add Keep Summaries option on Logging page User Manual Page I5 VPOP3 Your email post office Installation You can install VPOP3 as either a LAN mail server gateway or on a standalone PC or on a PC ona LAN but without expecting LAN connectivity Before you install decide where to install it Page 16 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office For Standalone Installation Server Configuration 20 Doing it all on one PC v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 7 VPOP3 Your email post office For LAN Installation Setting up your TCP IP LAN 18 Mail programs communicate with VPOP3 using the TCP IP protocol Choosing the VPOP3 Server 19 One PC on the network runs VPOP3 Server Configuration 20 Setting up the server to act as the mail postoffice Setting up your TCP IP LAN The network where VPOP3 is to be installed needs to support TCP IP TCP IP is the protocol used on the Internet A full discussion of setting up a TCP IP network is too complex to go into here but a quick introduction will take place Installing TCP IP support on the networked machines First of all you need to ensure that all the machines which will need to receive email from VPOP3 support TCP IP In Windows 95
279. utoResponders An AutoResponder is a tool which will automatically generate a response message when any message is sent to a specific VPOP3 mailbox There are two types of AutoResponder supported by VPOP3 Simple AutoResponders These are defined by a text file which contains the text to include in the response message Simple AutoResponders can be made more flexible by defining various sections containing different text to include depending on the incoming message subject Also Simple Autoresponders can include control sequences to control certain aspects of the response message for extra functionality and simple dynamic text content can be included External AutoResponders These are defined by an external program This can be something like a batch file a PERL script or a Visual Dialog Script program or even a C C program Simple AutoResponders Simple AutoResponders allow you to return text which stays the same or almost the same on each response You can specify minor variations for instance you can insert the current time date in the response message and you can tell VPOP3 to return different text depending on the subject of the incoming message If you need to have more complex intelligence in the AutoResponder you will need to use an External AutoResponder Defining a simple Autoresponder To define a Simple AutoResponder go to the Add Edit User window for the appropriate mailbox select Simple AutoResponder an
280. w to Write to STDERR Page 88 To write to STDERR you need to use functions which can write to a generic file handle or specifically to STDERR In C C use fprintf STDERR text n In PERL use print STDERR text n User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office In 4DOS Batch Files use ECHOERR text In Normal Batch Files use the ECHOERR EXE program supplied with VPOP3 v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 89 VPOP3 Your email post office Lists Types of Lists Mailing Lists Mailing Lists can contain zero or more email addresses any mix of local or remote addresses Distribution List Distribution Lists can contain zero or more email addresses any mix of local or remote addresses Group Groups are defined elsewhere and contain one or more related local users There are three built in groups which you cannot change explicitly these are described below Note that groups cannot be accessed from the Internet if you must access them from the Internet either create a wrapper list or create a Mapping from say Everyone to Everyone Forwarding Forwardings are special Distribution Lists which allow you to map a single local address to a single remote address You create Forwardings either by using the Import Forwarding button or by adding a Distribution List as normal You send messages to a List as if they were a normal user but VPOP3 will send the message to all members of that list aut
281. wait indefinitely for an incoming connection from the ISP because the ISP will not normally connect at all if there is no incoming mail If the ISP s SMTP software connects to VPOP3 within the specified time VPOP3 will stay online until the connection from the ISP has finished or until VPOP3 has finished sending mail whichever is the longer Note to use this facility you need to have Allow Connections on lt Any gt set for the SMTP Server on the Local Servers Property Page ETRN Page 32 Some ISPs require will require an ETRN command to be sent to tell them to start sending your email to you otherwise known as dequeuing your email If this is the case check the Use ETRN box and enter your domain or node in the text box If you do this whenever VPOP3 dials any of the connections listed in the Use Connections list it will connect to the Out Mail SMTP server associated with that connection and send it an ETRN lt domain gt command which should tell it to start sending your email to you If your ISP requires a different command to be sent to tell them to start sending you email you should write a small program for instance in PERL to send that command and trigger that using the Post Connect Extension User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Accepted Domains When receiving mail using SMTP VPOP3 uses the Local Domains setting on the Local Mail Property Page to determine whether the incomi
282. which you want the original email to be addressed to Then add a Remote Member which is the email address where you want the message to be forwarded to Eg if you want mail to henry yourcompany com to be sent to henry_brown compuserve com create a Distribution List called henry and add a Remote Member called henry_brown compuserve com Note you can set up simple forwarding lists in bulk by using the Import Forwarding button on the Lists page User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Logging Property Page The Logging Property Page lets you define what administrative logs VPOP3 generates lt VWPOPS Settings Ei EI Users Mappings Lists Local Mail Admin Connection l Iri Ml ail Out Mail Schedule Local Servers Misc Headers o L ogging A Diagnostics Info M Send Daily Summary Logs to Main Administrator M Show Idle Accounts in Summary Log I Generate HTML format messages M Keep Summary Logs Monitoring Monitor lncoming Messages Selected Monitor Outbound Messages Selected ad Monitor Intermal Messages None bi Monitor T arget monitor hi Use the Send Daily Summary Logs to Default User option to make VPOP3 send the Default User a daily summary log of each person s usage This log file contains a count of how many messages each person sent and received and what the total size of those messages was If you enable the Show Idle Accounts in Sum
283. who will have access to this information by using the FINGERALLOWED DAT file or by using the Allow Connections on options on the Local Server Property Page To Add information to VPOP3 s Finger Server It is possible to add to the information returned by VPOP3 s Finger server in two ways 1 the administrator can create an entry containing User Information This can be used to contain information such as the user s telephone extension job title etc This entry is created by using the User gt Add Edit window and pressing the Edit User Information button You can also change this information by directly editing the USERINFO TXT file in the user s mail directory If this file does not exist VPOP3 will simply not add the information to the output of a Finger query Note VPOP3 will only return with the User Information if the Finger query is verbose see your Finger software s documentation for how to set this 2 the user or administrator can create an entry containing a User Plan This can be used to contain information which the user wants to make public such as their interests current job role etc This entry is created by the administrator using the User gt Add Edit window and pressing the Edit User Plan button You can also change this information by directly editing the USERPLAN TXT file in the user s mail directory If this file does not exist VPOP3 will simply not add the information to the output of a Finger query
284. works on incoming email received using POP3 not incoming SMTP local or outgoing email Notes 1 Ifyou have multiple mappings which match a certain email address all the mappings will be used 2 If you have any mappings which match a certain email address the default routing ie jim a valid domain being sent to the jim mailbox will NOT be used Normally a message addressed to user yourcompany co uk will be sent to a user called user However by using mappings you can cause the message to be sent to a user called anotheruser You create mappings by going to the Mappings property page and pressing Add Add Mailbox Mapping Ei ES The External Email address can be domain anyone at 4 domain domain unrecognised users at a domain Or pretis with In to act only on incoming mail or From to map on a From address only on incoming mail External Email Address Target Mailbox ce e Enter the email address which will appear in the incoming mail and then telling VPOP3 which mailbox or list to place the message into The External Email Address should be either a local name e g simon if the address is local or a full email address e g philip domain com if the address isn t local The address is local if it is in a domain listed in the Accepted Domains field on the In Mail property page or in the Local Domains field on the Local Mail property page You can also specify the Ex
285. ws Messaging Exchange Client ccssececseceseseeeeeeees 138 OUtIGCK EXDr CSS inenen tntee Si een ean asin ts 140 OUtIOOK EXD ESS AG ACCOUNT erisera a eA E SA E 140 Outlook Express Edit ACCOUN aidicdcccelecormnneninnnnnnnnnnsionsennnnnnnniiinneeedaudakaaaaanaas 143 LDAP with Microsoft Outlook 98 or Outlook Express seessssesssesessssesesessoresesesses 149 Setting up the LDAP service in Outlook 98 or Outlook EXpresS e ssessessossesesessessessesseessessessessessess 149 Using the LDAP service in Outlook 98 nsn ssessessossessesssessessesreoressesseoseoseeseeseeseesseoseoseeseeseessessessesessessesreesess I5 Netscape Messenger Qurra rroen terete e E E E wine teeta eet eee A 52 LDAP with Netscape Messenger 4 u scssscsssscsessccscssssceesscsessccecssescessaceessceessceeseceaees 57 Setting up the LDAP service in Netscape Messenger 4 sssssssssecssesesssesssssseescsesescsesesesesesessseneseneeenees 57 Using the LDAP service in Netscape Messenger 4 ccsssssssssssssssesssssscscecscsessecseecccececececscscsesesesesescneees 158 LDAP Mth Cay DSO a a a a a a a Slclte lle 158 Setting up the LDAP service in Calypso ss sssesssesseessesssessesssesseesscsseesseoseesseeseesseesseoseesseoseesscoseeseesseoseeeseeseee 158 WIS ine the LEAP SENCE Ime aly PSO iiae EEEO 160 Download Rules 161 Possible Downlodd RUIS Actions iscsccccscccsiscessscsocsssscesssesosesescesusssosaseosesusesesessosssnsstotensdeevedeste
286. x Internet Outgoing Mail Size If the user setting is set to a value other than 0 zero then the user setting will take precedence otherwise the group setting takes precedence Maintain User Groups You can add edit delete user groups by going to User gt Advanced and pressing Define User Groups Manage User Groups Ei Ei Groups Hormal Edit Remove Set s Default Close Help e Press the New button to add a new group or the Edit button to edit the selected group e Press the Remove button to remove a group note that this will NOT remove all the users who are in that group ia e Press the Set As Default button to make the selected group into the default group for newly added users Export User Database You can export the VPOP3 User Database by going to the Users Property Page pressing Advanced and then pressing Export User List to File Export Userlist Save in Ej Vpop3 TJ Qutiueue E paul Postmaster File name Jusers cev Save as type esv Files Cancel Help M CSY Titles M Verbose Export M Export Passwords Page 62 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office This is anormal File Save As window but with a few extra options The CSV Titles option tells VPOP3 to write text titles to the start of the file so that if it is read into a spreadsheet the first row indicates the column contents You should always use this option i
287. xplorer OF E4 File Edt View Go Favorites Help S 9 ai a aw 3 F Back Bamsan Stop Refresh Home Search Favontes History Channels Address E http 192 168 57 1 5105 VPOPS3 AccessPanel for paul Oy Message List Change Password BI settings El ral zz m m Internet zone ze v 1 3 0 May 1999 User Manual Page 69 VPOP3 Your email post office Web Browser Message List AS POP3 Message List Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Go Favorites Help S a 8 2 a a E FL Back Banvana Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites VPOP3 Message List for fred Back to Main Index This is atest message Size 2303K yr aU Aug 1998 15 38 32 0100 fr Paul Smith lt pauli escs co uk gt Gy Delete Riesenie Send a Message Back to Main Index J o PO in i Internet zone Zs icon to read the message Any Select the message subject next to the attachments will be shown as downloadable links Select the message sender next to the 4 icon to reply to the message Select Delete Message next to the J icon to delete the message To send a message to a new recipient use the Send a Message link Page 70 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Changing Password using a Web Browser Log on to the VPOP3 user web server for example http 192 168 0 1 5108 and choose Change Password AS Change Password Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edt View G
288. y process messages to multiple recipients even if some are local and some are remote Let s say that clare sends a copy of her message to bill microsoft com to the local user mike When clare sends her message the email headers will say From clare localmail To bill microsoft com Cc mike localmail When bill microsoft com receives the message the headers will say From clare lt widgets superisp com gt To bill microsoft com Cc mike lt widgets superisp com gt When mike receives his copy of the message the headers will say From clare localmail To bill microsoft com Cc mike Llocalmail This means that Reply or Reply to All from either bill microsoft com or mike will work correctly Page 68 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Web Page User Access Mail HT TP Server The Mail HTTP server is a web server which can be used to allow people to access their VPOP3 mailboxes and configure some of their personal settings using a web browser Logging On 1 Inthe web browser tell it to go to http lt IP address of VPOP3 server gt 5108 eg http 192 168 0 1 5108 assuming you haven t changed the port assignment on the Local Servers page 2 The web browser will ask you for a username and password enter the VPOP3 mailbox name and password AccessPanel Once you are logged on VPOP3 will show you the main index 3 POP3 AccessPanel Microsoft Internet E
289. y to Assistant flag 1 send only to assistant 0 send to user mailbox 7 In Everyone List flag 1 in Everyone list 0 not in Everyone list 8 Is Internet Mail Sending Allowed flag 1 Internet mail allowed 0 not allowed e g User Id Admin Password Reply To Assistant Send Only To Assistant In Everyone List Is Internet Mail Allowed paul 1 FGIPTVIAUB 0 1 1 F10n a lt 0 POQZSIMLSP 0 1 1 echo Q0 GEWSGMHPSDFG 0 0 1 test 0 GQWWEAYNSGWZ testlist ourdomain co uk 0 1 1 Note the first line containing column titles is optional Page 64 User Manual v 1 3 0 May 1999 VPOP3 Your email post office Advanced User Database Configuration Options If you go to the User Property Page and press the Advanced button you will get access to some functions which operate on the entire User Database rather than on a single user Advanced User Functions EES 30 of 200 users in use Import User List from File Esport User List to File Import Usenet tron Aly Users Detine User Groups Edit External Address Book Close Help At the top of this window is a message telling you how many of your total allowed users have been defined Following this are some Import Export functions to allow you to import a VPOP3 User Database from an external sou

VPOP3 User Guide - Paul Smith Computer Services

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents